Advertisement
Advertisement
C200HX-CPU jj
-E/-ZE
C200HG-CPU jj
-E/-ZE
C200HE-CPU jj
-E/-ZE
Programmable Controllers
Installation Guide
Revised November 2001
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to the product.
!
DANGER Indicates information that, if not heeded, is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury.
!
WARNING Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
!
Caution Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1.
Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1996
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 What is a Control System?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 How Does a PC Work?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 Basic Configuration
2-2 Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Expanded System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Installation Environment
3-2 Wiring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Programming Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Using the Programming Console
4-2 Checking Initial Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Troubleshooting, Inspections, and Maintenance . . . . . . .
5-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendices
A Standard Models
B Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Unit Current and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Dimensions and Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
50
63
79
80
82
83
84
87
92
95
113
205
211
221
225
229
1
2
4
5 xi xii xii xii xiii xiv xv
9
10
14
31
33 vii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation of C200HX, C200HG, and C200HE Programmable Controllers, and it includes the sections described below. Programming and operating information is provided in the
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Operation Manual .
Please read this manual completely and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install a C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PC. Be sure to read the precautions in the following section.
Section 1 is an introduction to Programmable Controllers (or PCs). General information is provided on
PCs and how they work.
Section 2 provides a description of all the components of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. The names of the parts of each Unit are given. Expanded systems, including networks and Special I/O Units are also introduced.
Section 3 describes how to install and wire a PC System.
Section 4 provides general information about the Programming Console.
Section 5 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also covers maintenance and inspection, and explains how to replace consumable components such as fuses, relays, and batteries.
Appendix A provides tables of standard models.
Appendix B provides tables of Unit specifications.
Appendix C provides the current/power consumptions for the Units and calculations of the total consumption of a PC.
Appendix D provides Unit dimensions and mounting information.
A Glossary , and an Index are also provided.
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the PC. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii xii xii xiii xiv xv xi
Safety Precautions
1
2
5
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
•
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
•
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PCs.
Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!
WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the abovementioned applications.
3 Safety Precautions
!
WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!
WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!
WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!
WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
xii
Operating Environment Precautions 4
•
Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
•
The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
•
When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!
Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
!
Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in injury.
!
Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.
!
Caution When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane, be sure to use only Backplanes with “-V1” at the end of the model number. Using an 8-slot or 10-slot Backplane without “-V1” at the end of the model number may result in malfunction due to deterioration of the base or pattern burnout. The 3-slot and 5-slot Backplanes do not come in “-V1” models, and models without “-V1” can be used.
4 Operating Environment Precautions
!
Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
•
Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
•
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
•
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
•
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!
Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations:
•
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
xiii
Application Precautions 5
•
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
!
Caution The operating environment of the PC system can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC system. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC system.
!
WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
•
Always ground the system to 100
Ω
or less when installing the Units. Not connecting to a ground of 100
Ω
or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, Memory Cassettes, Power
Supply Units, or any other Units.
•
Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!
Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these precautions.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in this manual. An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
•
Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage.
Excess voltages may result in burning.
•
Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in this manual. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
xiv
Conformance to EC Directives
6
6
•
Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
•
Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
•
Wire correctly. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.
•
Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
•
Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
•
Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
•
Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may break the cables.
•
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct.
Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
Conformance to EC Directives
Observe the following precautions when installing the C200HX/HG/HE PCs that conform to the EC Directives.
1, 2, 3...
1. Since the C200HX/HG/HE PC is defined as an open type, be sure to install it inside a panel.
2. Provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power source connected to the DC I/O Unit and for a CPU Unit with a DC Power Supply
Unit.
3. The C200HX/HG/HE PC that conforms to the EC Directives also conforms, as an individual unit, to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2) of the
EC Directives. When incorporated into a device, however, the C200HX/HG/
HE PC may not satisfy this Standard due to the noise produced by the contact output when it switches on and off. In such a case, it will be necessary to take countermeasures such as connecting a surge or arc killer, or providing an external means of protection for the PC. The countermeasures taken to satisfy the Standard vary depending on the load devices, wiring, machinery configuration, etc. Described on page 137 are examples of countermeasures to be taken to reduce the noise.
xv
Conformance to EC Directives 6
Criteria for Taking Countermeasures
(Refer to EN50081-2 for details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the PC included is more than 5 times per minute.
xvi
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section provides general information about Programmable Controllers (PCs) and how they fit into a Control System.
1-1
1-2
What is a Control System?
The Role of the PC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Input Devices
1-2-2 Output Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 How Does a PC Work?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
4
5
2
4
1
What is a Control System?
Section 1-1
1-1 What is a Control System?
A Control System is the electronic equipment needed to control a particular process. It may include everything from a process control computer, if one is used, to the factory computer, down through the PCs (and there may be many of them networked together) and then on down through the network to the control components: the switches, stepping motors, solenoids, and sensors which monitor and control the mechanical operations.
Process Control Computer
Factory Computer
PC
PCs
PC PC
Control Components
A Control System can involve very large applications where many different models of PC are networked together or it could be an application as small as a single
PC controlling a single output device.
2
What is a Control System?
A Position Control System
Position Control Unit
Signal line for
Servomotor driver control
Input Unit
PC
Power source
Section 1-1
Power source
DC Servomotor
Driver
Hand-held Programming
Console
Control panel
Control switch
DC Servomotor Driver
DC Servomotor
DC Servomotor
In the typical Control System example shown above, a PC controls the movement of the workpiece bed across two horizontal axes using Limit Switches and
Servomotors to monitor and control movement.
3
The Role of the PC Section 1-2
1-2 The Role of the PC
The Programmable Controller, or PC, is the part of the Control System that directly controls the manufacturing process. According to the program stored in its memory, the PC accepts data from the input devices connected to it, and uses this data to monitor the controlled system. When the program calls for some action to take place, the PC sends data to the output devices connected to it, to cause that action to take place. The PC may be used to control a simple, repetitive task, or it may be connected to other PCs, or to a host computer in order to integrate the control of a complex process.
1-2-1 Input Devices
PCs can receive input from either automated or manual devices. The PC could receive data from the user via a pushbutton switch, keyboard, or similar device.
Automated input could come from a variety of devices: microswitches, timers, encoders, photosensors, and so on. Some devices, like the Limit Switch shown below, turn ON or OFF when the equipment actually makes contact with it. Other devices, like the Photoelectric Switch and Proximity Switch shown below, use other means, such as light or inductance, in order to get information about the equipment being monitored.
Photoelectric switch Limit switch
Proximity switch
1-2-2 Output Devices
A PC can output to a myriad of devices for use in automated control. Almost anything that you can think of could be controlled (perhaps indirectly) by a PC. Some of the most common devices are motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping
Motors, valves, switches, indicator lights, buzzers, and alarms. Some of these output devices; such as the motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping Motors,
4
How Does a PC Work?
Section 1-3 and valves; affect the controlled system directly. Others; such as the indicator lights, buzzers, and alarms; provide output to notify personnel.
Solenoid
Servomotor
Stepping motor
1-3 How Does a PC Work?
PCs operate by monitoring input signals and providing output signals. When changes are detected in the signals, the PC reacts, through the user-programmed internal logic, to produce output signals. The PC continually scans the program in its memory to achieve this control.
Block Diagram of PC
Power Supply
Memory
Signals from switches, sensors, etc.
Input
CPU
Output
Signals to
Solenoids, motors, etc.
Programming
Device
A program for your applications must be designed, and stored in the PC. This program is then executed as part of the cycle of internal operations of the PC.
5
How Does a PC Work?
Cycle
Cycle Time
Section 1-3
When a PC operates, that is, when it executes its program to control an external system, a series of operations are performed inside the PC. These internal operations can be broadly classified into the following four categories:
1, 2, 3...
1. Common (or overseeing) processes, such as watchdog timer operation and testing the program memory.
2. Data input and output.
3. Instruction execution.
4. Peripheral device servicing.
The total time required for a PC to perform all these internal operations is called the cycle time. The flowchart and diagram on the following page illustrate these internal operations for a typical PC.
Timing is one of the most important factors in designing a Control System. For accurate operations, it is necessary to have answers to such questions as these:
•
How long does it take for the PC to execute all the instructions in its memory?
• How long does it take for the PC to produce a control output in response to a given input signal?
The cycle time of the PC can be automatically calculated and monitored, but it is necessary to have an understanding of the timing relationships within the PC for effective system design and programming.
6
How Does a PC Work?
Flowchart of CPU Operation
Power application
Clears IR area and resets all timers
Checks I/O Unit connections
Resets watchdog timer
Checks hardware and
Program Memory
NO
Check OK?
YES
Resets watchdog timer and program address counter Sets error flags and turns
ON or flashes indicator
ALARM/ERROR
ERROR
(Solid ON)
Executes program
ALARM
(Flashing)
End of program?
NO
YES
SCAN(18) executed?
NO
YES
Resets watchdog timer and waits until the set cycle time has elapsed
Calculates cycle time
Resets watchdog timer
Refreshes input bits and output signals
Services RS-232C connector
Services Host Link Units
Services Peripheral devices
Services Communications
Boards
Services SYSMAC LINK and
SYSMAC NET Link Units
Section 1-3
Initialization on power-up
Overseeing processes
Program execution
Cycle time calculation
PC cycle time
I/O refreshing
RS-232C connector servicing
Host Link Unit servicing
Peripheral device servicing
Communicatio ns Board servicing
SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC
NET servicing
7
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Units
This section describes the system configuration used for the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PCs and the individual Units used in the system configuration.
2-1 Basic Configuration
2-1-1 CPU Rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 I/O Connecting Cable
2-2 Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Communications Boards
2-2-4 Power Supply Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-5 Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-6 Standard I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-7 Group-2 High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-8 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units
2-3 Peripheral Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Programming Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Ladder Support Software (LSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4 SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
2-4 Expanded System Configurations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions
2-4-2 Special I/O Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3 Link Systems and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
27
30
31
18
19
24
14
14
14
17
10
10
13
32
33
33
33
31
31
32
40
9
Basic Configuration Section 2-1
2-1 Basic Configuration
The basic configuration of the PC is shown below. With the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE, up to two or up to three Expansion I/O Racks (depending on the CPU Unit) can be connected to the CPU Rack, depending on the number of
I/O points required in the system.
CPU Rack
I/O Connecting Cables
Expansion I/O Racks
2-1-1 CPU Rack
An example of a CPU Rack is shown below. The CPU Rack consists of a CPU
Backplane, CPU Unit, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and other special Units.
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Backplane
Other Units
10
Basic Configuration Section 2-1
Power Supply Units The Power Supply Unit supplies power to the CPU Rack. The Power Supply
Units listed in the following table are available. Refer to 2-2-4 Power Supply
Units for further details.
Model
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
Supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC, ,
200 240 VAC
C200HW-PA204R/PA209R
(See note.)
C200HW-PD024 24 VDC
Remarks
---
Provides 24-VDC output terminals.
Equipped with RUN output contacts.
---
Note The C200HW-PA204R/PA209R cannot be used with all combinations of CPU
Units and Backplanes. Refer to page 23, Restrictions for the C200HW-PA204R/
PA209R , for details.
CPU Units
Model
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
The CPU Units listed in the following tables are available. Refer to 2-2-1 CPU
Units for further details on the CPU Units.
User program memory
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE 3.2K words
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE 7.2K words
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE 7.2K words
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE 15.2K words
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE 15.2K words
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE 15.2K words
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE 15.2K words
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE 31.2K words
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE 31.2K words
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE 31.2K words
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE 31.2K words
63.2K words
63.2K words
Data memory
4K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
Extended data memory
(EM)
---
---
---
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 8
(48K words)
6K words x 16
(96K words)
Instruction processing time (basic instructions)
0.3 µ s min.
0.3 µ s min.
0.3 µ s min.
0.15 µ s min.
0.15 µ s min.
0.15 µ s min.
0.15 µ s min.
0.1 µ s min.
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ s min.
s min.
s min.
s min.
s min.
Max. real I/O points supported
640 points
880 points
880 points
880 points
880 points
1,184 points
1,184 points
880 points
880 points
1,184 points
1,184 points
1,184 points
1,184 points
Max. No. of
Expansion
I/O Racks
2 Racks
2 Racks
2 Racks
2 Racks
2 Racks
3 Racks
3 Racks
2 Racks
2 Racks
3 Racks
3 Racks
3 Racks
3 Racks
11
Basic Configuration Section 2-1
Model Max. No. of Group-2
High-density I/O Units
64-point Units
(see note 1)
Max. No. of
(see note 2)
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE Not supported Not supported 10 Units
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE 10 Units
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE 10 Units
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE 10 Units
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE 16 Units
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE 16 Units
5 Units
5 Units
5 Units
8 Units
8 Units
10 Units
10 Units
10 Units
16 Units
16 Units
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE 10 Units
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE 10 Units
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE 16 Units
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE 16 Units
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
16 Units
16 Units
5 Units
5 Units
8 Units
8 Units
8 Units
8 Units
10 Units
10 Units
16 Units
16 Units
16 Units
16 Units
RS-232C Clock
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Communications
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1. Each 64 I/O Unit is treated as two Units.
2. Special I/O Units like the C200H-NC211 that are allocated the words for two
Units are treated as two Units.
3. Unit number settings for Group-2 Units for the following CPU Units must be between 0 and 9:
C200HE-CPU32/42-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44-E/ZE
CPU Backplane The CPU Backplane is required to mount the CPU Unit and other Units composing the CPU Rack. The following CPU Backplanes are available depending on the number of slot required for Units. Refer to 2-2-5 Backplanes for further details.
Model
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
3
5
Number of slots
C200HW-BC081-V1 8
C200HW-BC101-V1 10
Other Units
Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane, be sure to use the C200HW-
BC081-V1 or C200HW-BC101-V1.
The other Units that can be mounted to the CPU Rack include the Standard I/O
Units, High-density I/O Units, and Special I/O Units.
12
Basic Configuration Section 2-1
2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks
An example of an Expansion I/O Rack is shown in the following diagram. Expansion I/O Racks consist of and I/O Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and other Units. Expansion I/O Racks are connected to the CPU Rack to increase the number of I/O Units and other Units that can be used by the PC. You can connect up to 2 or up to 3 Expansion I/O Racks to a CPU Rack, the number depending on the CPU Unit that is used.
Power Supply Unit
I/O Backplane
Other Units
Power Supply Unit
I/O Backplane
Other Units
The Power Supply Unit supplies power to the Expansion I/O Rack. The Power
Supply Units listed in the following table are available. Refer to 2-2-4 Power Supply Units for further details.
Model
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
Supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC, ,
200 240 VAC
Remarks
---
Provides 24-VDC output terminals.
C200HW-PD204R
C200HW-PD209R
C200HW-PD024 24 VDC output contacts.
Note RUN output contacts cannot be used with Expansion I/O Racks.
The I/O Backplane is required to mount the Power Supply Unit and other Units composing the Expansion I/O Rack. The following I/O Backplanes are available depending on the number of slot required for Units. Refer to 2-2-5 Backplanes for further details.
Model
C200HW-BI031 3
C200HW-BI051 5
C200HW-BI081-V1 8
Number of slots
C200HW-BI101-V1 10
Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8 or 10-slot Backplane, be sure to use the C200HW-BC081-V1 or C200HW-BC101-V1.
The other Units that can be mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack include the Standard I/O Units, High-density I/O Units, and Special I/O Units.
13
Units Section 2-2
2-1-3 I/O Connecting Cable
The first Expansion I/O Rack is connected to the CPU Rack, and the second and third Expansion I/O Racks are connected to the previous Expansion I/O Rack through I/O Connecting Cable. There are five different lengths of cable available, which can be used as desired to provide the desired distance between each Rack. The sum of the lengths of all the I/O Connecting Cables connected within one PC, however, but be 12 m or less.
Model
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
Cable length
30 cm
70 cm
2 m
5 m
10 m
2-2 Units
2-2-1 CPU Units
The following diagram shows the components of the CPU Unit as viewed from the front cover. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the description.
6. Communications Board compartment
1. Indicators
2.
Memory Casette compartment
3. DIP Switch
4. Peripheral port
5. RS-232C port
14
Units Section 2-2
1, 2, 3...
1.
Indicators
The indicators (LEDs) on the front cover of the CPU Unit operate as described in the following table.
LED
RUN (green)
ERR (red)
INH (orange)
COMM (orange)
Contents
Lights when the PC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode.
Flashes if an error occurs that does not stop the CPU
Unit (a non-fatal error).
Lights if an error occurs that stops the CPU Unit (a fatal error). If a fatal error occurs, the RUN indicator will turn
OFF and the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF.
Lights when the Load OFF Bit (SR 25215) turns ON. If the Load OFF Bit is turned ON, the outputs from all
Output Units will turn OFF.
Lights when the CPU Unit is communicating via the peripheral or RS-232C port.
2.
Memory Casette Compartment
The Memory Cassette compartment contains the built-in RAM and can be used to mount an optional Memory Cassette. Refer to 3-1-8 Mounting
Memory Cassettes for the mounting methods.
15
Units Section 2-2
3.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is used to make various settings that determine who the PC will operate. The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit has a 6-pin DIP switch, as shown in the following diagram. The settings of these pins are listed in the following table.
Pin no.
Setting
1 ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
OFF
4
5
6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Function
Writing disabled for user memory.
Writing enabled for user memory.
Contents of the Memory Cassette automatically read when power is turned on.
Contents of the Memory Cassette not automatically read when power is turned on.
Programming Console messages displayed in English.
Programming Console messages displayed in the language stored in system ROM. (Messages displayed in Japanese with the Japanese version of system ROM.)
Setting function for special instructions enabled.
Setting function for special instructions disabled (default).
Standard communications parameters (see note) will be set for the following serial communications ports.
• Built-in RS-232C port
• Peripheral port (only when a CQM1-CIF01/-CIF02 Cable is connected. Does not apply to Programming Console.)
Note 1. Standard communications parameters are as follows:
Serial communications mode: Host Link or peripheral bus; start bits: 1; data length: 7 bits; parity: even; stop bits: 2; baud rate: 9,600 bps
2. The CX-Programmer running on a personal computer can be connected to the peripheral port via the peripheral bus using the above standard communications parameters.
The communications parameters for the following serial communications ports will be set in PC
Setup as follows:
• Built-in RS-232C port: DM 6645 and DM 6646
•
Peripheral port: DM 6650 and DM 6651
Note When the CX-Programmer is connected to the peripheral port with the peripheral bus, either set bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 0 Hex (for standard parameters), or set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6650 to 0
Hex and bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 1 Hex (for Host Link or peripheral bus) separately.
Expansion TERMINAL mode for the Programming Console; AR 0712: ON
Console mode for the Programming Console; AR 0712: OFF
Note All pins are set to OFF for the factory defaults.
4.
Peripheral Port
The peripheral port is connected to peripheral devices, such as the Programming Console.
5.
RS-232C Port
The RS-232C port is connected to external devices that support an
RS-232C interface, such as personal computers.
6.
Communications Board Compartment
The Communications Board compartment is used to mount a Communica-
16
Units Section 2-2 tions Board. Refer to 3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board for the mounting methods.
2-2-2 Memory Cassettes
Memory Cassettes can be optionally mounted to increase memory capacity over just the built-in RAM. There are two types of Memory Cassette available.
These are shown in the following diagram.
EEPROM Memory Cassette EPROM Memory Cassette
Notch
C200HW-ME
EEPROM Memory Cassette When an EEPROM Memory Cassette is installed in the CPU Unit, the user memory (UM) and I/O data can be directly read and written. There is no need for a backup power supply. The Memory Cassette can also be removed from the
CPU Unit and used for storing data.
Model
C200HW-ME04K
C200HW-ME08K
C200HW-ME16K
C200HW-ME32K
C200HW-ME64K
Capacity
4K words
8K words
16K words
32K words
64K words
Note The C200HW-ME64K can be used with the C200HX-CPU65-ZE/CPU85-ZE
CPU Units only. It cannot be used with other CPU Units.
EPROM Memory Cassette With an EPROM Memory Cassette, the program is written using a PROM Writer.
The ROM is mounted to the Memory Casette and then installed in the CPU Unit.
I/O data cannot be stored.
Model
C200HS-MP16K
Capacity
16K words/32K words
Memory Cassette Settings
EEPROM Memory Cassette Set the DIP switch. For an EEPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (write protect) to either ON or OFF. Setting it to ON will protect the program in the memory from being overwritten. Setting it to OFF will allow the program to be overwritten.
(The factory setting is OFF.)
EPROM Memory Cassette For an EPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (ROM Type Selector) according to the type of ROM that is mounted.
Pin no. 1
OFF
ON
ROM type
27256
27512
Model
ROM-JD-B
ROM-KD-B
Capacity
16K words
32K words
Access speed
150 ns
150 ns
17
Units Section 2-2
2-2-3 Communications Boards
An optional Communications Board can be mounted in the CPU Unit to provide communications with the following types of devices/systems through the communications port: SYSMAC LINK Systems, SYSMAC NET Systems, personal computers, Programmable Terminals (PTs), bar code readers, temperature controllers, devices with RS-232C or RS-422 interfaces, etc.
The following Communications Boards are available.
C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 C200HW-COM03-V1
Indicators Indicators
Bus
Connecting
Unit connector
Port A
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-422/
RS-485)
C200HW-COM04-EV1
Indicators
C200HW-COM05-EV1
Indicators
C200HW-COM06-EV1
Indicators
Bus
Connecting
Unit connector
Port A
(RS-232C)
Port B
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-232C)
Port B
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-422/
RS-485)
Model
C200HW-COM01
C200HW-COM02-V1
C200HW-COM03-V1
C200HW-COM04-EV1
C200HW-COM05-EV1
C200HW-COM06-EV1
Specifications
Connection port for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, or other Communications Units.
RS-232C port x 1
RS-422/485 port x 1
Connection port for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, or other Communications Units.
RS-232C port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
RS-232C port x 2 (supports protocol macros)
RS-422/485 port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
RS-232C port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
18
Units Section 2-2
Indicators (LEDs)
Note Use either the C200HW-COM01 or a V1 Communications Board for the ZE-version C200HX/HG/HE CPU Units.
The Communications Board indicators on the front panel of the CPU Unit indicate the status of the Board, as described in the following table.
Indicator Color
RDY Green
COMB
COMA
Status
Not lit
Flashing
Lit
Orange Flashing
Orange Flashing
Meaning
The Board cannot be used due to a hardware error on the Board.
A setting error has been discovered in the PC
Setup or the protocol data.
The Board is operating properly and communications are possible.
Communications are in progress with the device connected to port B.
Communications are in progress with the device connected to port A.
2-2-4 Power Supply Units
Power Supply Units provide power to the CPU Rack and the Expansion I/O
Racks. Power Supply Units are available for either AC or DC power input. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the description. (The following diagram shows the C200HW-PA204S.)
Part Names and Functions
1. POWER indicator
L
2
/N
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
L
1
100 to 120
200 to 240
+24 VDC 0.8 A
2.
Terminals for external connections
Note The AC input terminals may
L
2
/N be indicated as L
1
/N and L
2 instead of L
2
/N and L
1
on some Units. However, there
L
1 is no difference in their functions or performance.
L
1
/N
L
2
1, 2, 3...
1.
POWER Indicator
The POWER indicator will be lit whenever the Power Supply Unit is outputting 5 V.
19
Units Section 2-2
2.
Terminals for External Connections
These terminals are connected as shown in the diagram below. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the description.
RUN output Model Supply voltage
100 to
120 VAC or
Output capacity
5 VDC, 4.6 A,
30 W
Output terminals
Without Without C200HW-PA204
240 VAC
(Select the
24 VDC,
0.8 A
Without C200HW-PA204S the metal
Without With C200HW-PA204R the voltage selector terminals.)
24 VDC
5 VDC, 9 A,
45 W
Without
5 VDC, 4.6 A,
30 W
Without
With
Without
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
20
Units
Terminal Connections
Section 2-2
C200HW-PA204: AC Input
1. AC Input
2.
Voltage selector terminals
C200HW-PA204S: AC Input
L
2
/N
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
Input
L
1
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
1. AC Input
2.
Voltage selector terminals
L
2
/N
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
Input
L
1
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
3. LG
4. GR
3. LG
4. GR
5. 24 VDC output
24 VDC 0.8 A
Output
1. AC Input
C200HW-PA204R: AC Input
2.
Voltage selector terminals
C200HW-PA209R: DC Input
L
2
/N
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
Input
L
1
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
1. AC Input
2.
Voltage selector terminals
L
2
/N
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
Input
L
1
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
3. LG
4. GR
7. RUN output
3. LG
4. GR
RUN OUTPUT
250 VAC
24 VDC
2 A
7. RUN output
RUN OUTPUT
240 VAC
24 VDC
2 A Resistive
C200HW-PD024: DC Input
6. DC Input
24 VDC
3. LG
4. GR
1, 2, 3...
1.
AC Input (C200HW-PA20 jj Only)
Supply either 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC to the AC input terminals. If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the grounded phase side to the L
2
/N (or L
1
/N if so indicated) terminal.
2.
Voltage Selector Terminals (C200HW-PA20 jj Only)
Short these terminals with a metal short bar when 100 to 120 VAC is being supplied to the AC input terminals.
3.
LG
Ground the LG terminal to 100 Ω or less to increase resistance to noise and protect against possible electrical shock.
21
Units Section 2-2
4.
GR
Ground the GR terminal to 100
Ω
or less to protect against possible electrical shock.
5.
24 VDC Output (C200HW-PA204S Only)
The 24 VDC output terminals can be used to supply power to DC Input Units.
The combined power consumption for both 5 V and 24 V must be 30 W or less.
6.
DC Input (C200HW-PD024 Only)
Supply 24 VDC to the DC input terminals.
7.
RUN Output (C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Only)
The internal contact will turn ON when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or
MONITOR mode. These terminals are available only on the C200HW-
PA204R.
22
Units
Restrictions for the
C200HW-PA204R/PA209R
Section 2-2
Use the C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Power Supply Unit only with the following
CPU Units and Backplanes. CPU Units and Backplanes with manufacturing numbers earlier than the ones given cannot be used.
CPU Units
Model
C200HX-CPU65-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU11-E
C200HX/HG/HE-
CPU jj -ZE
Manufacturing number (See below.)
Made in Japan
20Z6 or later
2817 or later
19Z6 or later
Made in the Netherlands
0147 or later
2417 or later
25Z6 or later
0817 or later
19Z6 or later
1017or later
20Z6 or later
19Z6 or later
20Z6 or later
All models
Backplanes (with C200HW-PA204R)
Model
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081
C200HW-BC101
Manufacturing number (See below.)
Made in Japan
0617 or later
19Z6 or later
24Z6 or later
Made in the Netherlands
0147 or later
20Z6 or later
Backplanes (with C200HW-PA209R)
CPU Backplanes
C200HW-BC031 Same
I/O Backplanes
C200HW-BI031 Same
C200HW-BC051 number as for
C200HW-PA204R.
C200HW-BC081-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BC101-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BI051 number as for
C200HW-PA204R.
C200HW-BI081-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BI101-V1 (-V1 or later)
!
Caution When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit, be sure to use only the
Backplanes listed in the above table. Using a different Backplane may result in malfunction due to deterioration of the base or pattern burnout.
Note Manufacturing numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
j j j j
Year (Ex. 1997 = 7)
Month (1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
Day (01 to 31)
23
Units
2-2-5 Backplanes
CPU Backplane
Section 2-2
There are two types of Backplane: the CPU Backplane, used for the CPU Rack, and the I/O Backplane, used for Expansion I/O Racks. The Backplane serves to hold and connect the following types of Unit: the CPU Unit, the Power Supply
Unit, I/O Units, Special I/O Units, etc.
The components of the Backplanes are shown in the following diagrams and described following them. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the description.
4. Unit mounting slots
1.
Backplane mounting screw
I/O Backplane
2.
Power Supply
Unit connector
6. Unit lock levers
7. I/O Connecting Cable connector
5. Unit connector connector
4. Unit mounting slots
1.
Backplane mounting screw
2.
Power Supply
Unit connector
6. Unit lock levers 5. Unit connector
7. I/O Connecting Cable connector
1, 2, 3...
1.
Backplane Mounting Screws
Mount the Backplane firmly using four M4 screws.
2.
Power Supply Unit Connector
Connect the Power Supply Unit.
3.
CPU Unit Connector
Connect the CPU Unit.
4.
Unit Mounting Slots
Mount one Unit to each slot. There are 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots available on the
Backplane depending on the model of Backplane used.
5.
Unit Connectors
Connect I/O Units, Special I/O Units, Interrupt Input Units, and/or Analog
Timer Units.
Note Attach a C500-COV01 Connector Cover to any slot that is not being used to prevent dust and dirt from entering the unused connectors.
6.
Unit Lock Levers
The lock levers hold the Units in place. Press down on the level and pull up on the Unit to release the lock.
7.
I/O Connecting Cable Connector
Connect the I/O Cable from the CPU Rack to the first Expansion I/O Rack or between adjacent Expansion I/O Racks to this connector.
24
Units Section 2-2
2-2-6 Standard I/O Units
The following Standard I/O Units are available.
Input Units
Name
AC Input Unit
AC/DC Input Unit
Model number
C200H-ID211 12 to 24 VDC
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
24 VDC
100 to 120 VAC
C200H-IA122/IA122V 100 to 120 VAC
C200H-IA221 200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IA222/IA222V 200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
12 to 24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
Specifications No. of points
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
16 pts
Note The C200H-ID001/002 cannot be used on the following Backplanes: C200HW-
BC jj 1/BI jj 1.
Output Units
Name Model number
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC223
Triac Output Unit
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC226
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD21A
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA224
Specifications
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads)
No. of points
8 pts
12 pts
16 pts
5 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
8 pts
12 pts
16 pts
8 pts
0.3 A, 24 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
2.1 A, 24 VDC
8 pts
12 pts
16 pts
8 pts
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection 8 pts
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) 8 pts
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) 12 pts
1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection 16 pts
1 A, 250 VAC 8 pts
0.3 A, 250 VAC
1.2 A, 250 VAC
0.5 A, 250 VAC
12 pts
8 pts
12 pts
Optional Products
The following optional products are available for use with Standard I/O Units.
• I/O Unit Cover: C200H-COV11
Cover for 10-pin terminal block.
• Space Unit: C200H-SP001
Used for vacant slots.
25
Units Section 2-2
Components
The Standard I/O Units come in three shapes; A-shape, B-shape, and E-shape.
Refer to Appendix D Specifications for the dimensions of each Unit. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the description.
A-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block) B-shape I/O Unit (19-terminal Terminal Block)
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/OFF status of points
4. 10-terminal terminal block
4. 19-terminal terminal block
E-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block)
I/O Unit lock notch
Nameplate
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF status of points
10-terminal terminal block
Note The C200H-OC226 is an extended B-shape I/O Unit and its dimensions are different from those of the B-shape I/O Unit shown above.
26
Units Section 2-2
1, 2, 3...
1.
I/O Unit Lock Notch
The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2.
Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the I/O Unit.
3.
I/O Indicators (LEDs)
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points. The arrangement of the indicators varies with the model of I/O Unit, as shown in the following tables.
4.
Terminal Block
The terminal block is used to wiring I/O. There terminals blocks are removable and consist of two parts.
Units with 10-terminal
Terminal Blocks
Appearance Unit type
8-point Units
Model numbers
ID211, IM211, IA121,
IA221, OC221, and
OA216
8-point Units
F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)
OD213, OD411, OA221, and OA223
8-point Units
ALARM indictors
(with LEDs)
OD214
5-point Units OD223
Units with 19-terminal
Terminal Blocks
Appearance Unit type
16-point Units
12-point Units
8-point Units
Model numbers
ID212, IA122, IA122V,
IA222, IA222V, IM212,
OC225, OC226, OD212, and OD21A
OC222, OC222V, OD211,
OD217, OA222V, and
OA224
OC224 and OC224V
2-2-7 Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Group-2 High-density I/O Units come in two varieties; C-shape and D-shape.
The shape of the two varieties is the same, but C-shape Units have only one connector, while the D-shape Units have two. C-shape Units have 32 I/O points and
D-shape Units have 64 I/O points.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units can be used with C200H-CPU21/22/23/31 CPU
Racks and Expansion I/O Racks. They cannot be used with Slave Racks.
27
Units Section 2-2
C-shape Units (32-point Units)
Unit
DC Input Unit
Specifications
12 VDC; 64 pts
24 VDC; 32 pts
24 VDC; 64 pts
Transistor Output Unit 4.5 VDC,16 mA to
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 32 pts
4.5 VDC,16 mA to
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 64 pts
C
D
24 VDC, 0.5 A (5A/Unit); 32 pts C
Shape
D
C
D
Model
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID219
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD219
C200H-OD21B
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators
4. I/O number setting switch
5. 40-pin connector
D-shape Units (64-point Units)
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators LED
4. I/O number setting switch
6. Indicator switch
5. 40-pin connectors
28
Units Section 2-2
I/O Indicators
Units with One 40-pin
Connector
1, 2, 3...
1.
I/O Unit Lock Notch
The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2.
Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the I/O Unit.
3.
I/O Indicators (LED )
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points. The arrangement of the indicators varies with the model of I/O Unit, as shown in the following tables.
4.
I/O Number Setting Switch
This switch is used to set the I/O number for the Unit. Set the number to between 0 and F for Units with one 40-pin connector and to between 0 and 8 or A and E for Units with two 40-pin connectors.
5.
40-pin Connectors
The number of connectors depends on the Unit.
6.
Indicator Switch
Determines whether the status of connector 1 or connector 2 I/O points are shown on the I/O indicators.
Appearance Unit type
32 points Unit
Model numbers
ID216 and ID218
Units with Two 40-pin
Connectors
32 points Unit
F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)
OD218 and OD21B
Appearance Unit type
64 points Unit
Model numbers
ID111, ID217, and ID219
64 points Unit
F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)
OD219
29
Units Section 2-2
2-2-8 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units
Some High-density I/O Units are classified as Special I/O Units. Up to 10 or up to
16 Special I/O Units can be connected to a PC depending on the CPU Unit that is used. These Units have two 24-pin connectors. In general, these Units control
32 I/O points, although some Units can control 128 I/O points when set for dynamic operation.
Refer to Appendix B Specifications for detailed specifications and dimensions of the Units.
TTL Input Unit
DC Input Unit
TTL Output Unit
Unit
Transistor Output Unit
TTL I/O Unit
Model Number
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD501
C200H-OD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215
Specifications
5 VDC, 32 inputs
24 VDC; 32 inputs
5 VDC, 32 outputs
24 VDC; 32 outputs
5 VDC, 16 inputs, 16 outputs
12 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
24 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators LED
4. Unit number setting switch
5. 24-pin connectors
1, 2, 3...
1.
I/O Unit Lock Notch
The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2.
Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the Unit.
3.
I/O Indicators (LED )
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points.
4.
Unit Number Setting Switch
Turn OFF the power supply to the PC and set the unit number to between 0 and F using a flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to damage the slot or leave the switch set half-way between two settings.
5.
24-pin Connectors
There are two 24-pin connectors.
30
Peripheral Devices Section 2-3
2-3 Peripheral Devices
There are various Peripheral Devices that can be use to support C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE operation. These Peripheral Devices are introduced in this section.
2-3-1 Programming Consoles
There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE: the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The following illustration shows the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console.
Connected to Peripheral Port on CPU Unit.
C200H-CN222 (2 m) or
C200H-CN422 (4 m), Connecting
Cable
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
As shown in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit with C200H-CN222 or
C200H-CN422 Connecting Cable, which must be purchased separately.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.
2-3-2 Ladder Support Software (LSS)
The LSS is a powerful support software package for the OMRON C-series Programmable Controllers (PCs). The LSS runs on an IBM PC/AT or compatible personal computer, and can be use to program, monitor and control PCs. While some PCs require a SYSMAC NET Link Unit, Host Link Unit, or Peripheral Interface Unit to connect the computer running LSS, the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be connected directly to the LSS via it’s peripheral or RS-232C port.
The LSS provides displays of various useful lists when the computer is operated offline and can be used to monitor operating conditions of the PC, and to read and write PC data. PC programs can be developed in a mnemonic or ladder diagram form.
The LSS supports the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE only within the functions available for the C200HS.
31
Peripheral Devices Section 2-3
When working in ladder diagram form, not only the program is displayed but also other information such as I/O, block, and instruction comments can be input and displayed. Moreover, the LSS allows more than one PC to be connected to and monitored using a single computer. The monitoring speed can be accelerated if the optional S3200-NSB11-E SYSMAC NET NSB is used.
For details concerning LSS, refer to the Ladder Support Software Operation
Manual (W237) .
2-3-3 SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
The SSS is an advanced software application that runs on IBM PC/AT or compatibles and is used to program, monitor, and otherwise control OMRON SYSMAC
C-series PCs and SYSMAC CVM1 PCs. The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be connected directly to a computer running the SSS in exactly the same way as for the LSS.
The SSS can be used with any of the CVM1 PCs and with all of the many C-series PCs. The SSS automatically switches programming styles and other operations between the various PCs when a PC model is set in the SSS’s System
Setup.
All programs written on the Ladder Support Software or on the CV Support Software can be read and used by the SSS. Programs created for the C2000H or
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE families of PCs can be converted for use with CVM1
PCs so that existing programs can be used with the newer PCs.
The SSS naturally supports all of the functionality for C-series PCs as the LSS, plus some new functions that facilitate fast, efficient programming and operation.
2-3-4 SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software is the only support software currently compatible with the C200H j -ZE PCs. This software is designed to run on IBM
PC/AT or compatibles and allows you to perform all the operations of the Programming Console as well as many additional ones. PC programs can be written on-screen in ladder-diagram form as well as in mnemonic form. As the program is written, it is displayed on a display, making confirmation and modification quick and easy. Syntax checks may also be performed on the programs before they are downloaded to the PC.
The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software does not support any of the original
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Units at present.
32
Expanded System Configurations
2-4 Expanded System Configurations
Section 2-4
2-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions
A
High-speed Counter Units
Position Control Units
(C200H-NC111/112,
C200HW-NC113/213)
ASCII Units
Analog I/O Units
ID Sensor Units
Fuzzy Logic Units
4 units max.
A maximum of 16 Special I/O Units including PC Link Units can be mounted to any slot of CPU, Expansion I/O, and Slave Racks. I/O word numbers 100 to 199,
400 to 459, and DM 1000 to DM 2599 are allocated to each Special I/O Unit.
High-density I/O Units can be mounted Remote I/O Slave Units only when the
Remote I/O Slave Units are connected to C200H-RM001-PV1 or
C200H-RM201 Remote I/O Master Units.
The number of Special I/O Units used with a Slave Rack is limited by data transmission considerations, as shown in the table below. The numbers in the table indicate the maximum number of Units of groups A, B, C, or D which can be used with a single Slave Rack.
B
High-density and Mixed I/O
Units
Temperature Control Units
Cam Positioner Units
Heat/Cool Temperature
Control Unit
PID Control Unit
C
Temperature Sensor Units
Voice Units
D
Position Control Units
(C200H-NC211,
C200HW-NC413)
Motion Control Units
8 units max.
6 units max.
2 units max.
Note 1. When a combination of Units from groups A, B, C, and D is used, the number from each group must satisfy both the following equations:
3A + B + 2C + 6D
≤
12
A + B + C + D
≤
8
2. Other Units can be added until the total number of Units reaches ten. If PC
Link Units are used, the number of Units including the PC Link Units must not exceed ten.
2-4-2 Special I/O Units
It is possible to connect a variety of Special I/O Units to the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE Racks.
High-density I/O Units
(Special I/O Units)
The TTL Input Unit, DC Input Unit, TTL Output Unit, Transistor Output Unit, TTL
I/O Unit, and DC Input/Transistor Output Unit are High-density I/O Units.
The C200H-ID501, C200H-OD501, and C200H-MD501 are I/O Units for the
TTL Unit.
Eight input points each of the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501,
C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can be set for pulse input.
A High-density I/O Unit can retrieve pulse input, which is shorter in length than that of the High-density I/O Unit cycle time, as an input signal when the Highdensity I/O Unit is set for pulse input.
33
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4
The C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can each be set for
128 dynamic input points (64 points x two circuits) and the C200H-OD501 and
C200H-OD215 can each be set for 128 dynamic output points (64 points x two circuits).
High-speed Counter Units The High-speed Counter Units have the following six operation modes.
Linear, circular, preset, gate, latch, and sampling operation modes
The High-speed Counter Units, which have a counting speed of 50 kcps, can be used for phase-difference pulse input, adding and subtracting pulse input, and pulse and direction input. The High-speed Counter Units have eight-point output per single axis.
Rotary Encoder
Position Control Units The Position Control Units have pulse-train output, thus enabling connection to stepping motor drivers or servomotor drivers.
The C200H-NC111 and C200H-NC112 are for a single axis, and the
C200H-NC211 is for two axes.
Stepping motor driver or servomotor driver with pulse-train input.
5-V power supply
Stepping motor or servomotor
34
Expanded System Configurations
Analog I/O Units
Section 2-4
The Analog Input (A/D) Units retrieve analog inputs and the Analog Output (D/A)
Unit sends analog outputs.
The following Analog I/O Units are available:
C200H-AD001 with 4-point analog input, C200H-AD002 with 8-point analog input, C200H-DA001 with 2-point analog output, and C200H-DA002 with
4-point analog output
The Analog Input (AD) Unit is used.
Analog input
Preamplifier transducer
Sensor
Analog output
Servomotor controller variable adjuster
The Analog Output (DA) Unit is used.
Motor
Temperature Sensor Units The following table lists Temperature Sensor Unit models and available temperature sensors.
Only one kind of temperature sensor can be connected to the C200H-TS001 or
C200H-TS002. Each Temperature Sensor Unit connects to a maximum of four temperature sensor inputs.
C200H-TS001
Model
C200H-TS002
C200H-TS101
C200H-TS102
Connectable temperature sensor
K (CA)/K (IC)
K (CA)/L (Fe-CuNi) (available for DIN)
JPt 100 Ω
Pt 100
Ω
(available for DIN/1989JIS)
ASCII Unit
Thermocouple: K (CA), J (IC), L (Fe-CuNi)
Platinum resistance thermometer: JPt100 Ω , Pt100 Ω
BASIC programs can be input to the ASCII Unit via its port 1 from any personal computer in terminal mode if the personal computer incorporates an RS-232C interface.
It is possible to write BASIC programs with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.
Port 1
(RS-232C)
Port 1/2
BASIC Program:
Personal computer
Input: Bar code reader
Output: Printer and plasma display
35
Expanded System Configurations
Voice Unit
Section 2-4
Voice messages can be input from dynamic microphones or cassette tape recorders and output from loudspeakers or headsets via the Voice Unit.
The Voice Unit incorporates a sentence function and word combination function, either of which can be selected to record voice messages for 64 seconds maximum.
Voice can be saved on floppy disks with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.
Voice input
Microphone or cassette tape player
ID Sensor Units
Voice output
Headset or speaker
Voice saving/Re-input
C200H-CN224 Connecting Cable (2 m long with
6- and 25-pin connectors)
Personal computer, or PROM Writer
The ID Sensor Units are used to construct non-contact information recognition systems.
By connecting a R/W Head or R/W Antenna to an ID Sensor Unit, data can be written to the Data Carrier attached to each moving object and the data of the
Data Carrier can be read by the C200HS.
The following models of ID Sensor Units are available.
Electromagnetic induction model: C200H-IDS01-V1
Microwave model: C200H-IDS21
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console
Data Carrier
R/W Head
R/W Antenna
36
Expanded System Configurations
Fuzzy Logic Unit
Section 2-4
The C200H-FZ001 Fuzzy Logic Unit incorporates a high-functional fuzzy Logic processor and allows high-speed fuzzy logic.
A personal computer can be connected to the Fuzzy Logic Unit via RS-232C cables for software development and monitoring. Use the C500-SU981-E Fuzzy
Support Software for IBM PC/AT or compatible personal computers.
Temperature Control Units Thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers connect to the Temperature Control Unit. With the built-in selector of the Temperature Control Unit, ten kinds of thermocouples or two kinds of platinum resistance thermometers can be selected.
Select the control output of the Temperature Control Unit from the following.
Model
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Temperature sensor input
Platinum resistance thermometer:
Control output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Temperature Control Unit Data Setting Console
37
Expanded System Configurations
Cam Positioner Unit
Section 2-4
A single C200H-CP114 Cam Positioner Unit is as powerful as 48 mechanical cams because it can complete jobs that normally require 48 mechanical cams.
It is possible to set 16-point external output and 32-point internal output as cam output. The 32-point internal output can be retrieved as data by the C200HS.
Cam Positioner Unit Data Setting Console
Heat/Cool Temperature
Control Units
The Heat/Cool Temperature Control Units measure the temperature of an object with a connected temperature sensor (thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer), and heats and cools according to a preset control mode.
Select the control output of the Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit from the following.
Model
C200H-TV001
C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
Temperature sensor input
Platinum resistance thermometer:
Control output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit Data Setting Console
38
Expanded System Configurations
PID Control Unit
Section 2-4
The PID Control Unit scales inputs from connected sensors and then carries out
PID control according to preset control mode.
Select the control output of the PID Control Unit from the following.
Model
C200H-PID01
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
Control output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
PID Control Unit Data Setting Console
39
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4
2-4-3 Link Systems and Networks
The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be included in an expanded system configuration including a Host Link System (SYSMAC WAY), a PC Link System, Optical or Wired Remote I/O Systems (SYSMAC BUS), CompoBus/S, Compo-
Bus/D, SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK System. All of these can be used in common with the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. In addition, the following Unit can be connected: B7A Interface Unit. Specifications for all of these Units are provided in Appendix B Specifications .
SYSMAC LINK Systems OMRON’s SYSMAC LINK System is a communications network that connects up to 62 nodes to provide data links, data transfers, and datagram services.
CPU Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
C200HW-SLK13/SLK14
(optical)
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24
(coaxial cable)
SYSMAC-series PC
• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 2,966 words of data in the LR and/or DM Areas.
•
Data transfers of up to 256 words each can be implemented by programming the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90)) instructions in the user program.
• Data transfers via datagrams are also available using a command/response format.
•
A C200HW-COM01 or C200HW-COM04-E Communications Board and a
C200HW-CE001 or C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit are required to use a SYSMAC LINK Unit.
The C200H-APS03 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit is used as a backup power supply for optical SYSMAC LINK Systems.
40
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4
SYSMAC NET Link Systems OMRON’s SYSMAC NET Link System is an FA-oriented limited-area network that connects up to 126 nodes to provide datagram services, data transfers, and data links.
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
C200HS-SNT32
CPU Unit
Line server
Central power supply
SYSMAC-series PC
FA computer
• Data transfers via datagrams are implemented using a command/response format.
• Data transfers can also be implemented for up to 990 words each by programming the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90)) instructions in the user program.
•
Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 32 words of data in the LR Area and/or up to 99 words of data in other data areas.
• A C200HW-COM01 or C200HW-COM04-E Communications Board and a
C200HW-CE001 or C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit are required to use a SYSMAC NET Link Unit.
The C200H-APS01 and C200H-APS02 Power Supply Adapters are used to connect to a central power supply (and must be mounted in the slot immediately to the left of the SYSMAC NET Link Unit).
Note Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual (W178) for further information.
41
Expanded System Configurations
Host Link Systems
Section 2-4
A maximum of two Host Link Units can be mounted to slots in either the CPU
Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. The following Host Link Units are available:
C200H-LK101-PV1 (optical cable)
C200H-LK201-PV1 (RS-232C)
C200H-LK202-V1 (RS-422)
For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs SYSMAC WAY - Host Link
Units System Manual (W143) .
Host Link Unit FA computer
PC Link System
PC Link Unit
A PC Link System can be used to transfer data between PCs by means of LR
0000 through LR 6315. A maximum of two C200H-LK401 PC Link Units can be mounted to slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. For details, refer to the PC Link System Manual (W135) .
C200HS
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE
Note The PC Link Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
42
Expanded System Configurations
CompoBus/S Systems
Section 2-4
The CompoBus/S is a high-speed I/O data communications system designed to meet the needs of time-critical FA applications.
I/O Terminal
CompoBus/S Master Unit
Sensor Terminal
Bit Chain Terminal
•
The CompoBus/S Master Unit is mounted to the CPU Rack or an Expansion
I/O Rack. The number of Master Units that can be mounted is indicated below.
Number of Mountable Master Units
C200HX/HE, C200HG-CPU3 j
/4 j
/(-Z)
10 Units when used as 1 Special I/O Unit (i.e., 10 words allocated)
5 Units when used as 2 Special I/O Units (i.e., 20 words allocated)
C200HX, C200HG-CPU5 j /6 j /8 j (-Z)
16 Units when used as 1 Special I/O Unit (i.e., 10 words allocated)
5 Units when used as 2 Special I/O Units (i.e., 20 words allocated)
Note Unit numbers A to F can be set only with the following CPU Units.
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
•
For each Master Unit, up to 32 slaves can be connected for a maximum of 256 points of I/O data communications (8 input words and 8 output words).
• The Special I/O Area is used for data transmissions.
• A wide variety of slaves are available to support relay, sensor, and other I/O.
•
Bit Chain Terminals can also be used as slaves to send and receive small quantities of I/O points at greater distances.
Note The CompoBus/S Master Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
43
Expanded System Configurations
CompoBus/D Systems
Section 2-4
The Compobus/D is an I/O data communications system conforming to the
CompoBus/D standard being developed to standardize device-level networks for FA.
CQM1 (I/O Link Unit)
CompoBus/D Master Unit
I/O Terminal
Adapter
Sensor Terminal
Analog Input Terminal
Analog Output Terminal
•
The CompoBus/D Master Unit is mounted to the CPU Rack or an Expansion
I/O Rack. Only one Master Units can be mounted.
• Up to 50 slaves can be connected for a maximum of 1,600 points of I/O data communications (50 input words and 50 output words).
•
The IR Area is used for data transmissions (outputs: IR 50 to IR 99; inputs: IR
350 to IR 399).
• A wide variety of slaves are available to support relay, sensor, analog and other
I/O.
Note 1. The CompoBus/D System cannot be used at the same time as a Remote I/O
System.
2. The CompoBus/D Master Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
3. Slaves made by other manufacturers can be connected as long as they conform to the CompoBus/D standard.
44
Expanded System Configurations
Remote I/O Systems
Section 2-4
A maximum of two Optical or Wired Remote I/O Master Units can be mounted to slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. A maximum total of five
Slave Racks, each with a single Slave Unit, can be connected. C500 Slave
Racks can be used, but each C500 Slave Rack must be counted as two Racks in calculating the total. For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs Wired
Remote I/O System Manual (W120) or SYSMAC C-series Optical Remote I/O
System Manual (W136) .
Remote I/O Slave Unit Remote I/O Slave Unit
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit
Optical I/O Units I/O Interface Terminal
I/O terminal
Optical Systems
A maximum total of 64 Optical I/O Units can be connected in an optical system
(32 words).
Note 1. The number of Slave Racks is not related to the number of Master Units.
2. If the number of Optical I/O Units exceeds 32, a B500-RPT01(-P) Repeater
Unit is required.
3. Optical and Wired Units cannot be mixed in the same system.
Wired Systems
A maximum total of 32 I/O Interface Terminals and I/O Terminals (32 words) can be connected in a wired system.
45
Expanded System Configurations
Controller Link Systems
Section 2-4
Controller Link Units can be mounted to C200HX/HG/HE CPU Racks to create automatic data links that can be freely set between C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, and/or CV-series PCs. Controller Link Support Boards are also available so that
IBM PC/AT or compatibles can also be included in the Controller Link System.
Controller Link Systems support a message service that can be used as required for communications using the SEND and RECV instructions. An example configuration for C200HX/HG/HE PCs is shown below.
Controller Link Unit
(C200HW-CLK21)
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)
Communications Board
(C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1)
• Controller Link Systems are wired using multidrop connections with twistedpair cable. Each System can include up to 32 nodes and can extend up to 1 km for 500-Kbps communications and up to 500 m for 2-Mbps communications.
•
For data links, each PC node can read/write up to 8,000 words and each computer node, up to 32,000 words. The data link words can be either set automatically or that can be set manually to more efficiently meet the needs of specific applications using Controller Link Support Software.
• The message service can be used to send up to 2,012 bytes of data at a time.
•
A Communications Board (C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1) and a Bus Connection Unit (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) are required to mount a Controller Link Unit to a C200HX/HG/HE PC.
• The Controller Link Unit cannot be used with the C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE.
46
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4
PC Card Unit
PC Card Unit
(C200HW-PCU01)
The PC Card Units allows you to expand PC capabilities by adding a PC card.
The PC card can be used to save and retrieve CIO, DM, EM, and other data area contents between the CPU Unit and the PC card from the ladder-diagram program (using the CMCR instruction). An Ethernet card can also be used to connect to an Ethernet network so that data area or ladder-diagram program contents can be read or written from computers on the network. Examples of PC
Card Unit Applications are shown below.
PC Card Unit Ethernet Set
(C200HW-PCS01-EV1)
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)
Memory card
(SRAM, flash, ATA)
Hub
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)
Ethernet Card
MAU
Computer
Computer
Ethernet Unit
Note A media attachment unit (MAU) is required to connect twisted-pair cable to the CV-series Ethernet Unit.
• Program data read via a PC Card Unit cannot be edited on the Ladder Support
Software.
•
PCMCIA2.1 PC cards are used (except for 3.3V cards). Two PC card interface slots are provided. Up to two type I or type II cards can be mounted, or one type
III card can be mounted, enabling applications of standard SRAM, ATA, flash memory, and other PC cards.
• A Communications Board (C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1) and a Bus Connection Unit (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) are required to mount a PC
Card Unit to a C200HX/HG/HE PC.
47
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure to follow the instructions carefully during installing. Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction, resulting in extremely dangerous situations.
3-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Installing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Mounting Dimensions (Units: mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-5 DIN Track Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-6 Mounting Units to the Backplane
3-1-7 I/O Connecting Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-8 Mounting Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Standard I/O Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3 Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
63
68
74
58
60
61
62
53
54
55
50
50
51
49
Installation Environment Section 3-1
3-1 Installation Environment
This section details the necessary environmental conditions for installing the
PC. Proper installation procedures and a proper environment are essential to getting the best performance and reliability from your PC.
!
Caution Static electricity can damage PC components. Your body can carry an electrostatic charge, especially when the humidity is low. Before touching the PC, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object, such as a metal water pipe, in order to discharge any static build-up.
3-1-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions.
Ambient Conditions
Cooling
Clearance between Racks
Do not install the PC in any of the following locations. Doing so will affect PC life and may adversely affect operating performance.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
•
Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0
°
C or higher than 55
°
C
(or higher than 45
°
C when using a Programming Console).
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 35% or higher than 85%.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
•
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
•
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
•
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations.
•
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
•
Locations close to power supplies.
There are two points to consider in order to ensure that the PC does not overheat. The first is the clearance between the Racks, and the second is installation of a cooling fan.
The Racks need to have sufficient room between each other to allow for I/O wiring, and additional room to ensure that the I/O wiring does not hamper cooling.
The Racks must also be mounted so that the total length of the Connecting
Cable between all Racks in a given series does not exceed 12 m. As a general rule, about 70 to 120 mm should be left between any two Racks. Consider factors such as the width of the wiring duct, wiring length, ventilation, and ease of access to Units, when determining the spacing between Racks. Greater space is required between Racks when using certain CPU Bus and Special I/O Units.
Refer to the operation manuals for the Units you are using for details.
50
Installation Environment
Cooling Fan
Section 3-1
A cooling fan is not always necessary, but may be needed in some installations.
Try to avoid mounting the PC in a warm area or over a source of heat. A cooling fan is needed if the ambient temperature may become higher than that specified. If the PC is mounted in an enclosure, install a cooling fan, as shown in the following diagram, to maintain the ambient temperature within specifications.
Fan
PC
Louver
Noise Resistance Abide by the following precautions to help increase resistance to noise.
•
Do not mount the PC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
•
Install the PC at least 200 mm from power lines.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PC and the mounting surface.
3-1-2 Installing Racks
The following figures show two views, each consisting of a mounted CPU Rack and two Expansion I/O Racks. Provide a space of 20 mm minimum on the upper and lower sides of each duct for ventilation and Unit replacement.
Example Duct Layout 118 to 153 mm
30 mm
40 mm
30 mm
CPU
Duct
30 mm
I/O
Duct
I/O
Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is, with the printing on the front panels oriented as it would normally read. Racks may be mounted to any sturdy support meeting the environmental specifications.
Whenever possible, the Racks should be mounted to metal-plated mounting plate that are securely grounded. If all of the Racks cannot be mounted to the same mounting plate, the individual plates should be securely connected together using 3 wires of at least 2 mm
2
in cross-sectional area. The Backplanes are mounted to the plate(s) with four M4 screws each.
Whenever possible, use wiring conduit to hold the I/O wiring. Standard wiring conduit should be used, and it should be long enough to completely contain the
I/O wiring and keep it separated from other cables.
51
Installation Environment Section 3-1
Note Tighten the PC Rack mounting screws, terminal block screws, and cable screws to the torque of 1.2 N S m.
!
Caution Racks must be mounted horizontally so that the Units are upright (i.e., not upside down or lying on their backs). The Units can overhead and malfunction if not mounted properly.
I/O Connecting Cables Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 10 m long, but the sum total of all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks must be 12 m or less.
The duct work shown in the following diagram is recommended to hold I/O wiring. Although optional, this duct work can be used to house the wires from the I/O
Units that run along the sides of the Racks, keeping the wires from becoming entangled. This figure illustrates the correct way to mount the Racks.
Input duct Output duct
200 mm min.
Power duct
CPU
Rack
Expansion
I/O Rack
Breakers, fuses
Power equipment such as transformers and magnetic relays
Fuses, relays, timers, etc. (NOT heat-generating equipment, power equipment, etc.)
Terminal blocks for PC
Terminal blocks for power equipment
Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit at an ambient temperature exceeding 50
°
C, in order to improve air circulation, ensure that there is a
52
Installation Environment Section 3-1 gap of at least 80 mm between the top of the Power Supply Unit and the top of the panel, wiring ducts, parts, or any other structures.
80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.
C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.
C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.
3-1-3 Mounting Height
The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks is
118 mm or 153 mm depending on the type of I/O Units mounted. If Peripheral
Devices or connection cables are attached, the additional dimensions must be taken into account. Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the
PC is mounted.
118 to 153* mm
Approx. 180 to 223* mm
Note: Figures marked with an asterisk are for when the C200HW-PA209R is mounted.
53
Installation Environment
3-1-4 Mounting Dimensions (Units: mm)
Backplanes
A ± 0.2
Four, M4
130
CPU Backplane
7
118
±
0.2
Section 3-1
68 to 108 80 to 120
130 I/O Backplane
118 ± 0.2
6
Four, M4 W
Model
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
246 mm
316 mm
C200HW-BC081-V1 421 mm
C200HW-BC101-V1 491 mm
C200HW-BI031 175 mm
A
C200HW-BI051 245 mm
C200HW-BI081-V1 350 mm
C200HW-BI101-V1 420 mm
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
189 mm
259 mm
364 mm
434 mm
W
Note The C200HW-PA204R/PA209R cannot be used with all combinations of CPU
Units and Backplanes. Refer to page 23, Restrictions for the C200HW-PA204R/
PA209R , for details.
54
Installation Environment Section 3-1
Backplane Insulation Plates
If there is an electric potential difference between grounds when devices are wired separately, then use a Backplane Insulation Plate. There are four models available, corresponding to the number of slots in the Backplane. The dimensions at locations A, B, C, D, and E are shown below in millimeters for each Backplane Insulation Plate model.
135 (118) 110
M4 screws for mounting to PC
(4/5 places)
(B)
5-dia. holes for mounting
Base Insulation Plate
(4/6 places)
6
12 dia.
5 dia.
D
(A)
(E)
C
10
Insulation Plates for CPU Backplanes
For 3 slots
For 5 slots
For 8 slots
For 10 slots
Model
C200H-ATT31
C200H-ATT51
C200H-ATT81
C200H-ATTA1
E
261
331
436
506
Dimensions (mm)
D
210
C
---
B
---
280
385
455
---
---
---
---
227.5
270.5
A
246
316
421
491
Insulation Plates for CPU Backplanes
For 3 slots
For 5 slots
For 8 slots
For 10 slots
Model
E
C200HW-ATT32 190
C200HW-ATT52 260
C200HW-ATT82 365
C200HW-ATTA2 435
Dimensions (mm)
D
140
C
---
B
---
210
315
385
---
---
---
---
---
---
A
175
245
350
420
3-1-5 DIN Track Mounting
The PC may be mounted using DIN track if desired. This type of mounting is not required, and the PC may be directly mounted to any sturdy support meeting the environmental specifications (refer to Appendix B Specifications ). If you want to mount the PC on DIN track, you can order a DIN Track from OMRON (refer to
Appendix B Standard Models ). DIN Tracks come in the two heights shown below.
Note Never use DIN Track to mount Backplane in locations subject to vibration.
55
Installation Environment Section 3-1
DIN Track Mounting Bracket The DIN Track Mounting Bracket shown below is necessary for mounting the PC to the DIN Track.
DIN Track The following DIN Tracks are available.
Model
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
PFP-100N2
Specification
50 cm long, 7.3 mm high
1 m long, 7.3 mm high
1 m long, 16 mm high
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. The following diagram is a view of the back of the Backplane. Attach one
Mounting Bracket to the left and right sides of the Backplane as shown below.
Backplane
DIN Track Mounting
Bracket
There are two Backplane mounting screws each on the left and right sides of the Backplane. Use these screws to attach the DIN Track Mounting Brackets to the Backplane.
56
Installation Environment Section 3-1
2. Mount the Backplane to the DIN Track so that the claws on the Mounting
Brackets fit into the upper portion of the DIN Track as shown below.
This claw fits into the DIN Track
Backplane
DIN Track
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
3. Loosen the screws attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Backplane. Slide the Backplane upward as shown below so that the Mounting Bracket and
Backplane clamp securely onto the DIN Track. Tighten the screws.
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
DIN Track
Hold-down bracket
Projections
Slide this screw to the top of the projection and then tighten it.
57
Installation Environment Section 3-1
3-1-6 Mounting Units to the Backplane
The CPU Unit of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE has no I/O points built in. In order to complete the PC it is necessary to mount at least one or more I/O Units to the Backplane. Mount the I/O Unit to the Backplane by locking the top of the
I/O Unit into the slot on the Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards as shown in the following diagram.
Hook
Backplane
Lock lever
Press down on the yellow lock lever at the bottom of the slot, press the I/O Unit firmly into position, and then release the yellow lock lever, making sure the connector on the back of the Unit is properly connected.
58
(To remove a Unit, hold down the lock lever with an implement such as a screwdriver.)
Installation Environment Section 3-1
CPU Units, I/O Power Supply Units and Slave Units must have the screws on the bottom tightened with a Phillips screwdriver. The screwdriver must be held at a slight angle, so be sure to leave enough space below each Rack.
Duct
Phillips screwdriver
CPU Unit
I/O Power
Supply Unit
Remote
I/O Rack
Duct
20 mm min.
Backplane
20 mm min.
59
Installation Environment Section 3-1
3-1-7 I/O Connecting Cables
Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is with the printing on the front panels oriented as it would normally be read. The Racks should be mounted one above the other with the CPU Rack uppermost as shown below.
The C200HX/HG/HE is approved by Underwriters Laboratories under the condition that, “The device must be mounted vertically for ventilation purposes.”
Connect the CPU Rack to the first Expansion I/O Rack with an I/O Connecting
Cable and then connect each Expansion I/O Rack in order, again using I/O Connecting Cables. Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 10 m long, but the sum total of all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks must be 12 m or less.
Firmly connect the I/O Connecting Cables to the connectors on the Backplanes and tighten the connector screws. An I/O bus error will occur stopping PC operation if any of the I/O Connecting Cables is disconnected. Be sure to connect these Cables carefully and securely.
60
This connector is not used.
Cover is with a cap.
I/O Connecting
Cable
A hole of 53 mm is diameter is required to pass the connectors on the I/O Connecting Cables through. This hole can be reduced to 33 mm by removing the hood from the connector, but be sure to reassemble the connector properly and securely, and secure it with the connector screws.
The pull strength of the Cables is 5 kg. Do not allow more than 5 kg of force to be applied to the Cables.
Note 1. The sum of the length of all I/O Connecting Cables in one PC must be 12 m or less.
2. Be careful to connect the Cables in the correct locations.
3. Always secure the I/O connection cables with the connector screws.
Installation Environment
3-1-8 Mounting Memory Cassettes
Use the following procedure to mount a Memory Cassette.
Section 3-1
!
Caution Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Memory
Cassette. If a Memory Cassette is inserted into or removed from the CPU Unit with the power on, it may cause the CPU Unit to malfunction or cause damage to the memory.
1, 2, 3...
1. Open the Memory Cassette compartment cover.
2. Press the Memory Cassette firmly to the back to mount it.
3. Close the compartment cover.
61
Installation Environment
3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board
Section 3-1
!
Caution Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Communications Board. If a Communications Board is inserted into or removed from the
CPU Unit with the power on, it may cause the CPU Unit to malfunction, cause damage to the memory, or cause errors in communications.
1, 2, 3...
1. Open the Memory Cassette compartment cover.
2. Open the Communications Board compartment cover.
3. Slid the Communications Board in on the supports and press it firmly to the back of the compartment.
62
Wiring
4. Close the compartment covers.
Section 3-2
3-2 Wiring
3-2-1 Power Supply Wiring
AC Power Supply Units
Note 1. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit before wiring. This label is to prevent wiring clippings and other foreign matter from entering the
Unit during wiring procedures.
2. After completing the wiring, remove the protective label from the top of the
Unit before starting operation. The Unit will overheat if operated with this label in place.
C200HW-PA204 or
C200HW-PA204S
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with self-raising pressure plate)
Voltage selector
24-VDC output
1:1 isolation transformer
AC power source
Note The AC input terminals may
L
2
/N
L
1 be indicated as L instead of L
2
1
/N and L
2
/N and L
1
on some Units. However, there is no difference in their functions or performance.
L
1
/N
L
2
63
Wiring Section 3-2
C200HW-PA204R or
C200HW-PA209R
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with self-raising pressure plate)
1:1 isolation transformer
Voltage selector
AC power source
RUN
OUTPUT
Power supply
RUN output
AC Power Source
Voltage Selector
Isolation Transformer
Current Consumption
24-VDC Output
•
Supply 100 to 120 or 200 to 240 VAC.
•
Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range
Supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
Allowable voltage fluctuations
85 to 132 VAC
170 to 264 VAC
• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the grounded phase side to the L
2
/N (or L
1
/N if so indicated) terminal.
Shorted: 100 to 120 VAC
Open: 200 to 240 VAC
Short-circuit the voltage selection terminals with the shorting bracket supplied as an accessory to select 100 to 120 VAC supply voltage. For 200 to 240 VAC leave them open.
Noise between the PC and ground can be significantly reduced by connecting a
1-to-1 isolation transformer. Do not ground the secondary coil of the transformer.
The current consumption will be 120 VA max. (180 VA max. with the C200HW-
PA209) per Rack, and there will be a surge current of at least 5 times the max.
current when power is turned on.
Use these terminals as the power supply for 24-VDC Input Units. Never externally short these terminals; PC operation will stop if these terminals are shorted.
These terminals are available on the C200HW-PA204S only.
Although the 24-VDC output can supply up to 0.8 A, the combined power consumption for both 5 V and 26 V must be 30 W or less, i.e., the capacity of the
24-VDC output will be reduced if the Units mounted to the Rack consume a lot of current. Refer to Appendix C Unit Current and Power Consumption for the consumption current of each Unit.
64
Wiring Section 3-2
The output voltage of the 24-VDC output will vary with the current consumption of the load as shown in the following table. Be sure to check the current consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before using these terminals.
Less than 0.3 A 0.3 A or higher Load current on 24-VDC output
Accuracy of 24-VDC output for lot No. 0197 or later
Accuracy of 24-VDC output for lot No. 3187 or earlier
+17%
–11%
+10%
–20%
+10%
–11%
Note Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
0 1 9 7
1997 (Rightmost digit of year)
September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
01 (Day: 01 to 31)
Connect a dummy load as shown in the following diagram if the maximum operating voltage of the connected device is 26.4 V (24 V +10%).
I
L
Dummy load
R
L
Connected device
(Photoelectric
Switch, Sensor Input Unit, etc.
24 VDC
OUTPUT
•
Resistance of the dummy load:
R=24/(0.3 – I
120
L
Ω
) ( Ω )
when I
L
= 0.1 A
240 Ω when I
L
= 0.2 A
Not necessary when I
L
= 0.3 A
(I
L
: Total current of connected devices)
• Capacity of the dummy load resistance:
W=(0.3 – I
L
) x 26.4 x 5 (Safety factor)
30 W (120
Ω)
when I
L
= 0.1 A
15 W (240
Ω)
when I
L
= 0.2 A
Note Since the dummy load will generate heat, be careful not to allow any combustible materials to come in contact with the resistor.
65
Wiring
RUN Output
Crimp Terminals
Section 3-2
These terminals turn ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MON-
ITOR Mode. Use these terminals under the following specifications These terminals are available on the C200HW-PA204R/PA209R only.
Model
Contact form
Maximum switching capacity
C200HW-PA204R
SPST-NO
C200HW-PA209R
250 VAC: 2 A for resistive loads
0.5 A for inductive loads
24VDC: 2 A
240 VAC: 2A for resistive loads
120 VAC: 0.5 A inductive loads
24 VDC: 2A
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with screws.
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N
S
m.
Use round-type crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
!
Caution Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N
S
m. The loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or burning.
Note 1. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
2. Be sure to check the setting of the voltage selector before supplying power.
3. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit before turn on the power supply.
DC Power Supplies
Note 1. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit before wiring. This label is to prevent wiring clippings and other foreign matter from entering the
Unit during wiring procedures.
2. After completing the wiring, remove the protective label from the top of the
Unit before starting operation. The Unit will overheat if operated with this label in place.
C200HW-PD024
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with self-raising pressure plate)
DC power source
Note To satisfy the EC Directives (Low-voltage
Directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the 24-VDC power source connected to the Power Supply Unit.
66
Wiring
DC Power Source
Power Consumption
Crimp Terminals
Grounding
Section 3-2
Supply 24 VDC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range (19.2 to
28.8 V).
The power consumption will be 40 W max. per Rack, and there will be a surge current of at least 5 times the max. power when power is turned on.
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with screws.
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Do not reverse the positive and negative poles when wiring the power supply terminals.
Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit before turning on the power supply to ensure proper heat dissipation.
For satisfying the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply used for the CPU Unit.
Power Supply Unit
L
2
/N
L
1
To avoid electrical shock, attach a grounded (earth ground) AWG 14 wire (crosssectional area of at least 2 mm 2 ) to the GR terminal. The resistance to ground must be 100 Ω or less. Do not use a wire longer than 20 m. Care must be taken, because ground resistance is affected by environmental conditions such as soil composition, water content, time of year, and the length of time since the wire was laid underground.
The Line Ground (LG) terminal is a noise-filtered neutral terminal that does not normally require grounding. If electrical noise is a problem, however, this terminal should be connected to the Ground (GR) terminal.
PC operation may be adversely affected if the ground wire is shared with other equipment, or if the ground wire is attached to the metal structure of a building.
67
Wiring
Crimp Terminals
Section 3-2
When using an Expansion I/O Rack, the Rack must also be grounded to the GR terminal. The same ground can be used for all connections.
OK OK Wrong
Other devices
Other devices
Other devices
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with screws.
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N
S
m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
3-2-2 Standard I/O Unit Wiring
Electric Wires
Crimp Terminals
!
Caution Check the I/O specifications for the I/O Units, and consider the following points.
•
Do not apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage or fire.
•
When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire them correctly.
Note To satisfy the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power source connected to the DC I/O Unit.
Use a separate power source for the DC I/O Unit from the external power supply for the Contact Output Unit.
The following electric wires are recommended.
Terminal Block Connector
10-terminal
19-terminal
Electric Wire Size
AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm 2 )
AWG 22 (0.32 mm 2 )
Note The allowable current capacity of electric wiring differs depending on factors such as ambient temperature, insulation thickness, etc., so be sure to take these factors into account when selecting electric wire.
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with screws.
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
For satisfying the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply used for the I/O Units.
68
Wiring
Wiring
Section 3-2
Be sure that each Unit is securely mounted. In order to prevent wire scraps and other objects from getting inside of the Unit, keep the top-surface label on while wiring the Unit. After the wiring has been completed, be sure to remove the label in order to allow heat radiation.
During wiring After wiring
Remove the label.
Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure that the
I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
Do not place the wiring for I/O Units together or in the same duct as power lines.
Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising pressure plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below.
Terminal Blocks Unlock the terminal block of an I/O Unit to remove the terminal block from the I/O
Unit. You do not have to remove the lead wires from the terminal block in order to remove it from an I/O Unit.
Locks for terminal block.
Unlock to remove the terminal block from the I/O Unit. Make sure the terminal block is locked securely after wiring is complete.
69
Wiring
I/O Unit Covers
Input Devices
DC Input Units
Section 3-2
A C200H-COV11 Cover is provided as an I/O Unit cover for Units that use 10P terminal block connectors. After the I/O wiring has been completed, slide the cover up from the bottom, as shown in the illustration below. These Covers should be applied whenever the extra protection is required.
Attach
Remove
I/O Unit cover
Observe the following information when selecting or connecting input devices.
The following types of DC input devices can be connected.
Contact output
IN DC Input Unit
COM
NPN open-collector output
+
Output
7 mA
0 V
Sensor
Power
Supply
NPN current output
+
Current regulator
Output
7 mA
0 V
Sensor
Power
Supply
PNP current output
+
Output
Sensor
Power
Supply
7 mA
0 V
IN DC Input Unit
COM
IN DC Input Unit
COM
IN AC/DC Input Unit
COM
70
Wiring Section 3-2
The circuit below should be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
+
COM
Output
IN DC Input Unit
0 V Sensor
Power
Supply
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
+
Output
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC Input Unit
0 V
COM
AC Input Units
Contact output
IN AC Input Unit
COM
AC Switching
Proximity switch main circuit
IN AC Input Unit
COM
Input Leakage Current
Note When using Reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, keep the allowable current to 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with smaller allowable currents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge currents.
When two-wire sensors, such as photoelectric sensors, proximity sensors, or limit switches with LEDs, are used, the input bit may be turned ON erroneously by leakage current. In order to prevent this, connect a bleeder resistor across the input as shown below.
Input power supply
Bleeder resistor
R PC
Sensor
If the leakage current is less than 1.3 mA, there should be no problem. If the leakage current is greater than 1.3 mA, determine the resistance (R) and power rating (W) for the bleeder resistor using the following formulas.
71
Wiring
For standard I/O Units:
I = leakage current in mA
R =
W =
2.4
7.2
x I – 3 k
Ω
2.3
––– W min.
R
max.
The previous calculations are based on the following equations.
I
R
Input voltge (24)
Input current (10)
R
) Input voltage (24) v
OFF voltage (3)
Input current (10)
Section 3-2
W w
Input voltage (24)
R
Input voltage (24) Tolerance (4)
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire
DC Sensor
When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-VDC or 24-VDC input device, check that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions may result in operating errors.
1, 2, 3...
1. Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and the sensor residual voltage:
V
ON x V
CC
– V
R
2. Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
I
OUT
(min)
I
ON
= (V x I
ON x I
OUT
(max.)
CC
– V
R
– 1.5 [PC internal residual voltage])/R
IN
When I
ON
is smaller than I
OUT
(min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R x (V
CC
– V
R
)/(I
Power W y
(V
CC
OUT
(min.) – I
ON
– V
R
)
2
)
/R
×
4 [allowable margin]
Note The residual voltage in the PC is 4.0 V for the following Units:
C200H-ID211/ID212/IM211/IM212/INT01
The residual voltage is 1.5 V for all other Units.
72
Wiring Section 3-2
3. Relation between current when the PC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
I
OFF y I leak
Refer to Input Leakage Current later in this section for details.
The I
OFF values differ for each Unit, but is always 1.3 mA for Input Units whose OFF current specifications are not given.
R
IN
DC Input Unit
V
CC
V
ON
I
ON
I
OFF
R
IN
:
Two-wire sensor
: Power voltage
: PC ON voltage
PC ON current
: PC OFF current
: PC input impedance
V
R
R
V
CC
V
R
: Sensor output residual current
I
OUT
: Sensor control current (load current)
I leak
: Sensor leakage current
R: Bleeder resistance
Output Circuits
Output Short-circuit
Protection
If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output elements and printed boards may be damaged. To guard against this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit.
Transistor Output Residual
Voltage
Output Leakage Current
When connecting TTL circuits to transistor Output Units, it is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor and a CMOS IC between the two. This is because of the residual voltage left on the transistor output after the output turns OFF.
If there is a possibility of leakage current causing a transistor or triac to malfunction, connect a bleeder resistor across the output as shown below.
PC
OUT
L
R
Bleeder resistor
COM
Load power supply
Determine the value and rating for the bleeder resistor using the following formula.
R
V
ON
–––
I
Where
V
ON
= ON voltage of the load in V
I = leakage current in mA
R = bleeder resistance in k
Ω
73
Wiring
Output Surge Current
Section 3-2
When connecting a transistor or triac Output Unit to an output device having a high surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), care must be taken to avoid damage to the Output Unit. The transistor and triac Output Units are capable of withstanding a surge current of ten times the rated current. If the surge current for a particular device exceeds this amount, use the circuit shown below to protect the Output Unit.
PC
OUT
COM
R
L
+
Another way of protecting the Output Unit lets the load draw a small current
(about one third the rated current) while the output is OFF, significantly reducing the surge current. This circuit (shown below) not only reduces the surge current, but also reduces the voltage across the load at the same time.
R
OUT L
+
PC
COM
3-2-3 Electrical Noise
I/O Signal Lines
Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or tubes. If placing them together cannot be avoided, use shielded cable to minimize the effects, and connect the shielded end to the GR terminal.
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables
Suspended duct
In-floor duct Conduits
74
Wiring Section 3-2
Inductive Load Surge Suppressor
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, it is necessary to connect a surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below. This is so that the back EMF generated by the load will be absorbed.
IN
L Diode DC input
COM
L
OUT
Contact Output Unit
Triac Output Unit
Surge suppressor
COM
OUT
L
Contact Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
+
Diode
COM
Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge Suppressor
Resistance:
Capacitor:
Voltage:
Diode
50 Ω
0.47
200 V
µ F
Leading-edge peak inverse voltage:
Average rectified current:
At least 3 times load voltage
1 A
75
Wiring
External Wiring
Interlock Circuits
Section 3-2
If power cables must be run alongside the I/O wiring (that is, in parallel with it), at least 300 mm must be left between the power cables and the I/O wiring as shown below.
Low current cable
1
Control cable
2
300 mm min.
Power cable
3
300 mm min.
Class-3 ground
Where: 1 = I/O wiring
2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct (for example, where they are connected to the equipment), they must be shielded from each other using grounded metal plates.
Metal plate (iron)
200 mm min.
1 2 3
Class-3 ground
Where: 1 = I/O wiring
2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning
ON at the same time.
Interlock circuit
MC2
00501
MC1 Motor clockwise
PC
MC1
00502
MC2 Motor counterclockwise
76
Wiring
Power Interruptions
Section 3-2
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from ever both being ON at the same time. Even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions, the motor is protected.
A sequential circuit is built into the PC to handle power interruptions. This circuit prevents malfunctions due to momentary power loss or voltage drops. A timing diagram for the operation of this circuit is shown below.
The PC ignores all momentary power failures if the interruption lasts no longer than 10 ms (no longer than 2 ms for a DC Power Supply). If the interruption lasts between 10 and 25 ms (between 2 and 5 ms for a DC Power Supply), the interruption may or may not be detected. If the supply voltage drops below 85% of the rated voltage for longer that 25 ms (less for the DC Power Supply), the PC will stop operating and the external outputs will be automatically turned OFF.
Operation is resumed automatically when the voltage is restored to more than
85% of the rated value. The diagram below shows the timing of PC operation and stopping during a power interruption. The time it takes to detect the power failure is shorter when the power supply is DC. Also, the voltage value for which the C200HX/HG/HE will stop due to a drop in the power supply voltage will be lower than that for AC.
Power interrupted
Power restored
Power supply
Time lapse until detection
Power failure detection signal
+5 V
CPU Unit operating voltage
Power supply reset
77
SECTION 4
Programming Console Operation
This section describes the function of the Programming Console and its connection methods.
4-1 Using the Programming Console
4-1-1 Nomenclature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Connecting the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Checking Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
80
81
82
79
Using the Programming Console Section 4-1
4-1 Using the Programming Console
4-1-1 Nomenclature
The front panel of the Programming Console is shown below, taking the
C200H-PRO27-E as an example.
LCD area
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
Mode selector switch
Numeric keys
Instruction keys
Cassette jacks
Operation keys
LCD Area
Mode Selector Switch
Keys
This window displays the program contents and monitor status.
PROGRAM MODE:
RUN MODE:
MONITOR MODE:
Used for creating programs.
Used for executing the programs.
Used for monitoring PC status.
Instruction, numeric, and operation keys are used for inputting the program and data.
Note 1. The operations of C200H-PRO27-E and CQM1-PRO01-E Programming
Consoles are the same.
2. The following keys look different but have the same functions.
AR
HR
HR
SET
RESET
PLAY
SET
REC
RESET
80
Using the Programming Console Section 4-1
4-1-2 Connecting the Programming Console
There are two Programming Console models that can be used with the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE: the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The following illustration shows how a Programming Console (a C200H-PRO27-E in this case) connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit.
C200H-CN222 or C200H-CN422
Connecting Cable
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console
As indicated in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit with C200H-CN222 (2 m) or C200H-CN422 (4 m) Connecting Cable, which must be purchased separately.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.
81
Checking Initial Operation Section 4-2
4-2 Checking Initial Operation
After the Programming Console has been connected, it can be used to check initial C200HX/C200HG/C200HE operation. Make sure that the Programming
Console is properly connected and that the correct power supply is being provided, and then follow the procedure outlined below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check to be sure that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode.
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
2. Turn on the power to the PC and check the CPU Unit indicators. The green
POWER indicator should light.
3. Check the Programming Console display and input the password (Clear and then Monitor Keys). If operation is normal, the display should appear as shown below.
<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD
<PROGRAM> BZ
Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.
Note If the mode is not indicated, turn off and restart the power supply.
4. After checking PC operation, turn off the power. If operation is not normal, refer to 5-1 Troubleshooting .
82
SECTION 5
Troubleshooting, Inspections, and Maintenance
The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE provides self-diagnostic functions to identify many types of abnormal system conditions.
These functions minimize downtime and enable quick, smooth error correction.
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also provides inspection and maintenance information that can be used to help prevent the occurrence of errors.
5-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Replacing Output Unit Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Replacing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Batteries
5-3 Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
87
87
88
91
92
83
Troubleshooting Section 5-1
5-1 Troubleshooting
CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks
Error
POWER indicator does not light.
Probable cause
The voltage selector terminal setting is wrong. (A 100-VAC voltage is used when set to 200 VAC.)
The 24-V output terminals are externally shorted.
An internal fuse has blown.
RUN indicator does not light.
The Power Supply Unit is broken. (A
200-VAC voltage was used when set to 100 VAC.)
There is a short-circuit in the internal power supply. (There is a short-circuit in the 5/26-VDC supplied by the
Power Supply Unit in a Unit on the
Rack.)
The program has an error (no END instruction).
A power supply line is defective.
Special I/O Units are assigned overlapping unit numbers.
A Slave Unit’s power supply is turned off, or no Unit is set as the terminator.
The power circuit is defective.
RUN indicator is lit, but RUN output does not turn on.
Relays do not operate from a particular number onwards.
Outputs (or inputs) turn ON for particular Relay numbers.
All the bits from a particular Unit turn
ON.
The I/O bus is defective.
Possible correction
Correct the voltage selector terminal setting.
Correct the wiring.
Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Replace the Unit with the short-circuit.
Correct the program.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Correct the unit number assignments.
Turn on the power to the Slave Unit, or set a Unit as the terminator.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Replace the Backplane.
84
Troubleshooting Section 5-1
Input Units
Error
Indicator lights are turned off, and no
Probable cause
No external input power supply is provided.
The external input voltage is low.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
The input circuit is defective.
Possible correction
Provide a power supply.
Supply the rated voltage.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Replace the Unit.
Indicator lights are turned ON, but no inputs turn ON.
All inputs remain ON, and will not turn
OFF.
The input circuit is defective.
Replace the Unit.
i l l b b
Operation is normal, but the input indicator does not light.
An input device is defective.
Input wiring is disconnected.
Replace the input device.
Check the input wiring.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Adjust the input device.
The ON time for external inputs is too short.
The input circuit is defective.
An input bit address is used for an
OUT instruction in the program.
The input circuit is defective.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
An input bit address is used for an
OUT instruction in the program.
The external input voltage is low.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
Supply the rated voltage.
There is malfunctioning due to noise.
Apply noise countermeasures such as installing a surge suppressor, installing an isolation transformer, and using shielded cables.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
Common terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
The CPU Unit is defective.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Replace the CPU Unit.
The LED is defective.
Replace the Unit.
85
Troubleshooting
Output Units
Error
Section 5-1 i f f
Outputs all fail to turn OFF.
i l i i turn OFF.
l l
R l i l R l
OFF.
l l
R l
R l b b b b d d d d
Operation is normal, but the output indicator does not light.
Probable cause
A load power supply is not provided.
Possible correction
Provide the power supply.
The load power supply voltage is low.
Provide the rated voltage.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
A fuse is blown.
I/O bus connectors are making poor contact.
The output circuit is defective.
The output circuit is defective.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Replace the fuse.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the Unit.
The output ON time is too short.
The output circuit is defective.
The program’s OUT instruction bit addresses overlap.
An output device is defective.
Output wiring is disconnected.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
Output Relays are defective.
The output circuit is defective.
Correct the program.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
Replace the output device.
Check the output wiring.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Replace the Relays.
Replace the Unit.
Output Relays are defective.
There is faulty restoration due to leakage current or residual current.
The output circuit is defective.
Replace the Relays.
Replace the external load or add a dummy resistor.
The program’s OUT instruction bit addresses overlap.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
The load power supply voltage is low.
Supply the rated voltage.
The program’s OUT instruction bit addresses overlap.
Correct the program.
There is malfunctioning due to noise.
Apply noise countermeasures such as installing a surge suppressor, installing an isolation transformer, and using shielded cables.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
Common terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making poor contact.
A fuse is blown.
The CPU Unit is defective.
The LED is defective.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or replace them if necessary.
Replace the fuse.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Replace the Unit.
86
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2
5-2 Inspection and Maintenance
5-2-1 Replacing Output Unit Fuses
The following Output Units each contain one fuse. Replace the fuse if the fuse indicator lights. The OD211, OD212, OA222, and OA224 Output Units do not have fuse indicators. Replace the fuses on these Units if outputs are not produced.
Unit Fuse indicator Capacity
(20 mm long x 5.2 mm dia.)
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA224
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
250 V, 5 A
250 V, 3 A
250 V, 5 A
250 V, 3.15 A
The OD411, OD213, OA221 and OA223 Output Units also provide an external output bit that can be used to check the condition of the fuse. If bit 08 of the word allocated to the Unit is ON, the fuse is burnt out.
To replace a fuse, follow the steps below. Use only UL/CSA certified replacement fuses.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom of the terminal block.
3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as shown below, remove the Output Unit.
Lock lever
87
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2
4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.
(4)
(5)
6. Pull out the printed circuit board.
7. Insert a new fuse. A spare fuse is provided inside the rear of the case when the Unit is delivered.
Rear of the case
Spare fuse
8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.
Note 1. Use UL or CSA approved fuses if the UL or CSA standards must be satisfied. For further details, consult the fuse manufacturer.
2. Fuses in High-density I/O Units cannot be replaced by the user. Refer to your OMRON dealer for service.
5-2-2 Replacing Relays
Replacement Relay The following Output Units provide relay sockets that allow the Relays to be replaced if they should go bad. Use the Relay listed in the table.
Output Unit
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC226
Relay
G6B-1174P-FD-US
G6R-1, 24 VDC
Use the following procedure to replace a Relay.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom of the terminal block.
88
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2
3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as shown below, remove the Output Unit.
Lock lever
4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.
(4)
(5)
6. Pull out the printed circuit board. The Relays are placed on the PC boards of individual Units as shown in the figures below.
7. A Relay puller is provided inside the rear of the case when the Unit is delivered. Use the Relay puller to pull out the Relay as shown below. Insert a new
Relay.
Relays for the C200H-OC222V/OC224V/OC226V can be replaced without using the Relay puller.
Using the Relay puller, pull the Relay up and out of the socket.
Relay puller
Printed circuit board
8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.
89
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2
!
Caution Check the pin arrangement before inserting a new Relay into the socket. Pins can only be inserted one way, so do not try to force them if they do not go in easily.
Applying too much force can bend the pins and render them unusable.
OC221/OC224
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
OC222
5
7
9
11
3
4
6
0
1
2
8
10
OC223
0
1
2
3
4
OC225
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
8
10
12
14
0
2
4
6
OC222V
0
2
4
6
9
10
11
1
3
5
7
8
90
Inspection and Maintenance
OC224V
Section 5-2
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
OC226
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
6
8
10
12
14
0
2
4
5-2-3 Batteries
!
DANGER Batteries can burn, explode, or leak. Absolutely do not short-circuit across the terminals, attempt to recharge batteries, or take them apart, heat them, or expose them to fire.
When the battery is nearly discharged, the ERR indicator will flash and the message “BATT FAIL” will appear on the Programming Console. When this occurs, replace the battery within one week to avoid loss of data.
The normal battery service life is five years at 25
°
C. The service life will be shorten if used at higher temperatures.
The Battery Fail Flag is allocated to 25308 for the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE.
The battery comes together with its connector as a set. To replace the Battery
Set (C200H-BAT09), follow the steps below. The entire replacement must be completed within five minutes to ensure that the data will not be lost.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC. (If the power was not already ON, turn the power ON for at least one minute before turning the power OFF.)
2. Remove the cover from the battery compartment of the CPU Unit.
3. Remove the old Battery Set.
4. Install the new Battery Set as shown in the following diagram.
91
Inspections Section 5-3
5. Replace the cover of the battery compartment.
6. Press CLR, FUN, MONTR, MONTR or just turn the power to the PC OFF and then ON again to clear the error message on the Programming Console.
5-3 Inspections
1
No.
2
3
4
5
Item
Main power supply
Ambient
I/O power supply
Installation
Consumable parts
Daily and periodic inspections are required to keep PCs working in top condition.
PC are constructed out of semiconductor components, which although have an extremely long life time, can deteriorate under improper environmental conditions. Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the required conditions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the following table are not met.
Contents
Check the voltage fluctuations at the power supply terminals.
Criteria
The voltage must be within the allowable voltage fluctuation (see following table)
Temperature must be 0 to 55 _ C.
Remarks
Voltage tester
Thermometer Measure the temperature inside the control panel.
Measure the humidity inside the control panel.
Check for dirt and dust.
Humidity must be 35% to 85%.
Humidity meter
Check the voltage fluctuations at the I/O terminals.
Check the mounting of all Units.
Check all cable connections.
Check all external wiring screws.
Check all external wiring cables.
Contact output Relays:
G6B-1174P-FD-US
24 VDC
Battery: C200H-BAT09
There must be no collection of dirt and dust.
Voltages must be within specifications for each Unit.
The Units must be firmly mounted.
Visual
Voltage tester
Phillips screwdriver
The cables must be firmly connected.
Phillips screwdriver
The screws must be firmly tightened.
Visual
The cables must not be damaged in any way.
Electrical life
Visual
---
Resistive loads: 300,000 operations
Inductive loads: 100,000 operations
Mechanical life: 50 million operations
Expected life: 5 yrs at 25 _ C ---
Voltage Fluctuation
Power supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
24 VDC
Allowable voltage fluctuation
85 to 132 VAC
170 to 264 VAC
19.2 to 28.8 VDC
Handling Precautions
• Always turn off the power supply before replacing a Unit.
•
After replacing a faulty Unit, check the new Unit to make sure that the same problem does not appear again.
• When returning a Unit for repairs, provide as many details about the problem as possible in writing and attach it to the Unit before delivering it to your
OMRON representative. (See inside back cover for regional offices.)
• To clean bad contacts, use a clean cotton cloth soaked in industrial alcohol and be sure to remove any threads from the cloth before mounting the Unit.
92
Inspections
Inspection Tools
• Required Tools
• Screwdrivers (flat-blade and Phillips)
•
Voltage tester (analog or digital)
• Industrial alcohol and a clean cotton cloth
•
Tools Required in Special Cases
• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
•
Thermometer and humidity meter
Section 5-3
93
Appendix A
Standard Models
CPU Rack
Name id d i h l k f i
Power Supply Units d l
UM
3.2K words None
7.2K words
15.2K words
31.2K words
EM
(1 b
(3 b
Specifications
6K words k)
18K words k )
I/O points
640
880
880
1,184
880
63.2K words 48K words
(8 banks)
96K words
(16 banks)
1,184
1,184 Yes
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
RS-232C
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
External output:
Output terminals, 0.8 A at 24 VDC
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
RUN output (SPST-NO contact):
Switching capacity: 2 A for resistive loads/0.5 A for inductive loads at 250 VAC; 2 A at 24 VDC
See page 23 for CPU Unit and Backplane restrictions.
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 9.0 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
RUN output (SPST-NO contact):
Switching capacity: 2 A for resistive loads at 240
VAC; 0.5 A for inductive loads at 120 VAC; 2 A at 24 VDC
See page 23 for CPU Unit and Backplane restrictions.
Power supply voltage:
24 VDC
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
Model number
---
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
95
Standard Models Appendix A
Name
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots (see note)
10 slots (see note)
Specifications Model number
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081-V1
C200HW-BC101-V1
PC Card Unit
Name
Note There are restrictions in combining Backplanes and Power Supply Units when using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane.
Communication Boards (See
EEPROM
Specifications
4K words
8K words
16K words
32K words
64K words (see note)
EPROM 16K words/32K words
Equivalent to 27256, 150 ns, 12.5 V
Equivalent to 27512, 150 ns, 12.5 V
Communications port for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC
NET Link Units
RS-232C port
RS-422/485 port
Communications port for the SYSMAC LINK Unit and
SYSMAC NET Link Unit and a protocol macro function
Two RS-232C ports and a protocol macro function
RS-422/485 port, an RS-232C port, and a protocol macro function
Two interface slots for PMCIA2 PC cards.
Model number
C200HW-ME04K
C200HW-ME08K
C200HW-ME16K
C200HW-ME32K
C200HW-ME64K
C200HS-MP16K
ROM-JD-B
ROM-KD-B
C200HW-COM01
C200HW-COM02-V1
C200HW-COM03-V1
C200HW-COM04-EV1
C200HW-COM05-EV1
C200HW-COM06-EV1
C200HW-PCU01
Controller Link Unit
Ethernet expansion function included
A separate Bus Connection Unit is required.
C200HW-PCS01-EV1
C200HW-CLK21
Note: Use the V1 Communications Boards for the C200HZ/HG/HE-CPU jj -ZE CPU Units. The C200HW-
COM01 can also be used.
96
Standard Models
Expansion I/O Racks
Name
I/O Backplanes
Specifications
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (with 24-VDC output terminals)
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
24 VDC
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
30 cm
70 cm
2 m
5 m
10 m k b 12 i
Slave Racks
Slave
Name
Remote I/O Slave
I/O Blocks
I/O
T i l
AC input
DC input
Output
Specifications
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
24 VDC
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
24 VDC
Input
Output
Specify either 12 or 24 VDC.
Specify either 100 or 200 VAC.
Specify either 12 or 24 VDC.
Specify either 12 or 24 VDC.
Appendix A
Model number
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
Model number
APF/PCF C200H-RT001-P
C200H-RT002-P
Wired C200H-RT201
C200H-RT202
G71-IC16
G71-OD16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-OC16
97
Standard Models Appendix A
I/O Units
Name
Input Units AC Input Units
Output
DC Input Units
AC/DC Input Units
Interrupt Input Unit
(see note)
Relay Output Units
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
Triac Output Units
Transistor Output
Analog Timer Unit
24 VDC
Specifications
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
12 to 24 VDC
Model number
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122/IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222/IA222V
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
C200HS-INT01
8 pts
12 pts
5 pts
8 pts
16 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
(see note)
1 A, 120 VAC
1 A, 200 VAC
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222/OC222V
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224/OC224V
C200H-OC225
8 pts
8 pts
C200H-OA121-E
C200H-OA221
12 pts 0.3 A, 200 VAC C200H-OA222V
8 pts
12 pts
8 pts
12 pts
16 pts
8 pts
8 pts
1.2 A, 250 VAC
0.5 A, 250 VAC
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC (see note)
2.1 A, 24 VDC
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); w/load short protection
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA224
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
8 pts
12 pts
16 pts
0.3 A, 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
0.3 A, 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217
1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection
C200H-OD21A
4 timers 0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10 min (switchable)
C200H-TM001
Variable
Resistor
Connector
Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor C4K-CN223
98
Standard Models Appendix A
Name
B7A Interface Units 15 or 16 input pts
16 output pts
Specifications
Connects to B7A Link Terminals. Standard transmission delay.
Connects to B7A Link Terminals. Standard transmission delay.
Model number
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1 (see note)
Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. In addition, Interrupt Input Units require that a version 2 (i.e., model numbers with a “-V2” suffix) Backplane be used at the CPU Rack. If an earlier version Backplane is mounted, the interrupt function cannot be used. When mounting the C200H-OC225, C200H-OD212, or
C200H-B7AO1 to a Backplane, make sure that the model number of the Backplane includes the suffix
“-V1” or “-V j
.” The C200H-OC225, C200H-OD212, or C200H-B7AO1 cannot be mounted to any Backplane the model number of which does not include the suffix “-V1” or “-V j
.”
2. The C200H-OC225 can overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.
Group-2 I/O Units
Name
DC Input Units
Specifications
12 VDC
24 VDC
Transistor Output
B7A Interface Units
64 pts
32 pts
64 pts
32 pts
64 pts
32 pts
32 pts
32 pts
32 input pts
32 output pts
16 input and
16 output points
32 input and
32 output points
16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA at 26.4 V
0.5 A (5 A/Unit) at 24 VDC
Connects to B7A Link Terminals.
delay.
Model number
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID219
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD219
C200H-OD21B
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
99
Standard Models Appendix A
Special I/O Units
Name
Transistor Output
DC Input/Transistor
Output Units
32 pts
32 pts
32 pts
32 pts
16 input and 16 output pts
16 input and 16 output pts
Specifications
5 VDC (TTL inputs); w/high-speed input
24 VDC; w/high-speed input
0.1 A, 24 VDC (useable as 128-point dynamic output unit)
35 mA, 5 VDC (TTL outputs) (useable as
128-point dynamic output unit)
24-VDC inputs; w/high-speed input; 0.1-A,
24-VDC outputs (useable as 128-point dynamic input unit)
5-VDC TTL inputs; w/high speed input;
35-mA, 5-VDC TTL outputs (useable as
128-point dynamic input unit)
Fuzzy Logic Unit
16 input and 16 output pts
12-VDC TTL inputs; w/high speed input;
12-VDC TTL outputs (useable as
128-point dynamic input unit)
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 4 inputs; 12 bits
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs;
12 bits or BCD
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs;
16 bits p 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 2 outputs
4 to 20 mA, –10 to 10 V; 4 outputs
1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 outputs
4 to 20 mA; 8 outputs
Mixed Analog I/O
Units
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 2 inputs;
16 bits
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable);
2 outputs
Programmed using the Fuzzy Support Software. Up to 8 inputs and 4 outputs.
Model number
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD215
C200H-OD501
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003
C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-DA003
C200H-DA004
C200H-MAD01
C200H-FZ001
Fuzzy Support
Software
Available on either 3.5” or 5.25” floppy disks.
C500-SU981-E
Heat/Cool t C t l U it
Thermocouple K(CA) or J(IC), switchable; 4 inputs
Pt resistance
K(CA) or L(Fe-CuNi) DIN standards;
4 inputs
Pt 100 Ω ; 4 inputs
Pt 100 Ω ; 4 inputs; DIN and 1989 JIS standards
Thermocouple Transistor output
Pt resistance
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Thermocouple Transistor output
Pt resistance
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
C200H-TS001
C200H-TS002
C200H-TS101
C200H-TS102
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
C200H-TV001
C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
100
Standard Models Appendix A
Name
Cam Positioner Unit
Specifications
Detects angles of rotation by means of a resolver and provides ON and OFF outputs at specified angles. A maximum of 48 cam outputs (16 external outputs and 32 internal outputs) maximum are available.
Model number
C200H-CP114
Data Setting Console
PID Control Units
Position Control Units
Used to set and monitor data in Temperature Control Units,
Cam Positioner Units, PID Control Units, and Heat/Cool
Temperature Control Units.
2 m
4 m
Transistor output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs (selectable)
Voltage output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs
(selectable)
Current output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs
(selectable)
1 axis
1 axis
2 axis
1 axis
Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 100,000 pps
Pulse output; directly connects to servomotor driver; compatible with line driver; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps
Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps,
53 pts per axis
Pulse train output; directly connects to servomotor driver
2 axis
4 axis
Pulse train output; directly connects to servomotor driver
Pulse train output; directly connects to servomotor driver
G-language programmable 2-axis analog outputs Motion Control Unit
MC Support Software IBM PC/AT or compatible
Connecting cable 3.3 m
Teaching Box
Connection cable for
Teaching Box
---
2 m long
--Memory Pack (with key sheet) (see note
2)
Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
Connecting cable for
Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
High-speed Counter Units
Simplifies wiring for I/O connectors.
ASCII Unit
1 axis
1 axis
Pulse input; counting speed: 50 kcps; 5
VDC/12 VDC/24 VDC
Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps;
RS-422 line driver
2 axes Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps;
RS-422 line driver; 7-digit BCD
24K-byte RAM and 24K-byte EEPROM are built-in.
C200H-DSC01
C200H-CN225
C200H-CN425
C200H-PID01
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
C200H-NC111
C200H-NC112
C200H-NC211
C200H-NC113
C200H-NC213
C200H-NC413
C200H-MC221
CV500-ZN3AT1-E
CQM1-CIF02
CVM1-PRS71
CV500-CN224
CVM1-MP701
XW2B-20J6-6
XW2Z-100J-F1
C200H-CT001-V1
C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021
C200H-ASC02
101
Standard Models
ID Sensor Units
Name
Read/Write Heads
Data Carriers
Voice Unit (see note 3)
Connecting Cable
Specifications
Local application, electromagnetic coupling
Remote application; microwave transmissions
Electromagnetic type
Microwave type
SRAM type for V600-H series.
EEPROM type for V600-H series.
60 messages max.; message length: 32, 48, or 64 s
(switchable)
RS-232C
Appendix A
Model number
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
V600-H series
V620-H series
V600-D jj R jj
V600-D jj P jj
C200H-OV001
C200H-CN224
Note: 1. When mounting a High-density I/O Unit as a Special I/O Unit to a Slave Rack, the Remote I/O Master must be the C200H-RM001-PV1 or C200H-RM201.
2. The CV-series Programming Console can be used as a Teaching Box by replacing the Memory Pack of the Programming Console.
3. Observe the following points when using the C200H-OV001 Voice Unit:
•
The C200H-OV001 Voice Unit cannot be used when an OMRON display device (Programmable Terminal) is connected to the peripheral port or the RS-232C port of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) CPU Unit in NT Link mode. Connect the Programmable Terminal to the serial communications port of a C200HW-COM jj
Communications Board.
• When using a C200H-OV001 Voice Unit mounted on the PC, set the baud rate of the CPU Unit’s peripheral port or RS-232C port to 9,600 bps or less (regardless of the serial communications mode).
102
Standard Models Appendix A
Communication Units
Name
SYSMAC LINK Unit
(coaxial cable)
Specifications
A Bus Connection Unit must be ordered Data link table:
918 words
Data link table:
2,966 words
One required for each node at ends of System.
Provided with SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Terminator
Attachment
Stirrup
F Adapter
F Adapter
Cover
SYSMAC LINK Unit
(optical fiber cable)
Power Supply
Adapter
Power Cable
SYSMAC LINK Support
Board (coaxial cable)
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
Power Cable
Bus Connection Units
To connect network
To connect network
Connect with H-PCF cable. A Bus separately.
Required when supplying backup power
Data link table:
918 words
Data link table:
2,966 words
For 1 or 2
Units
For 1 Unit
For 2 Units
To connect IBM PC/AT or compatible as node in SYSMAC LINK system
A Bus Connection Unit must be ordered separately.
For 1 Unit
For 2 Units
For 1 Unit Connects Power Supply Included with
C200H-APS01
Link Unit.
Included with
C200H-APS02
Connects SYSMAC LINK Unit or SYSMAC NET
For 2 Units
For 1 Unit
Communications Board
For 2 Units
Host Link Units
PC Link Unit
Rack-mounting
Single level: 32 Units
Multilevel: 16 Units
C200H, C200HS, APF/PCF
C200HG, C200HX RS-422
RS-232C
RS-485
Model number
C200HW-SLK23
C200HW-SLK24
C1000H-TER01
C200H-TL001
C1000H-CE001
C1000H-COV01
C200HW-SLK13
C200HW-SLK14
C200H-APS03
C200H-CN111
C200H-CN211
3G8F5-SLK21-E
C200HS-SNT32
C200H-APS01
C200H-APS02
C200H-CN001
C200H-CN002
C200HW-CE001
C200HW-CE002
C200H-LK101-PV1
C200H-LK202-V1
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK401
CompoBus/D Master Unit --C200HW–DRM21
CompoBus/S Master Unit --C200HW–SRM21
103
Standard Models
Name
Remote I/O Master
Units
Specifications
Up to two per PC; connectable to up to 5 Slaves per PC total
APF/PCF
Wired
Appendix A
Model number
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RM201
Remote I/O Slave Units
Controller Link Unit
PC Card Unit
See Racks at beginning of product lists.
Enables data link and message communications.
Communications Board and Bus Connection Unit are required separately.
Compatible with the PMCIA2.1 and provided with two PC Card I/F slots. Ethernet extension function added.
C200HW-CLK21
C200HW-PCU01
C200HW-PCS01
Other Wired Remote I/O System Products
Name
Remote I/O Interface
I/O Blocks AC Input Unit
DC Input Unit
Output Unit
Specifications
Input
Output
Either 12 or 24 VDC
Either 120 or 240 VAC.
Either 12 or 24 VDC
Either 12 or 24 VDC
Model number
G71-IC16
G71-OD16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-OC16
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Hardware
Name Specifications
SYSMAC NET Network Support Board For IBM PC/AT or compatible
SYSMAC LINK Network Support
Board
For IBM PC/AT or compatible, coaxial cable connector
Model number
S3200-NSB11-E
3G8F5-SLK21-E
Link Adapters
Name
Link Adapters
Specifications
3 RS-422 connectors
3 optical connectors (APF/PCF)
3 optical connectors (PCF)
1 connector for RS-232C; 2 for RS-422
1 connector each for APF/PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C
1 connector each for PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C
1 connector each for APF/PCF and AGF
1 connector each for PCF and AGF
1 connector for APF/PCF; 2 for AGF
1 connector for PCF; 2 for AGF
O/E converter; 1 connector for RS-485, 1 connector each for
APF/PCF
Used for on-line removal of SYSMAC NET Link Units from the
SYSMAC NET Link System, SYSMAC NET Optical Link Adapter 3 connectors for APF/PCF.
Model number
3G2A9-AL001
3G2A9-AL002-PE
3G2A9-AL002-E
3G2A9-AL003
3G2A9-AL004-PE
3G2A9-AL004-E
3G2A9-AL005-PE
3G2A9-AL005-E
3G2A9-AL006-PE
3G2A9-AL006-E
B500-AL007-P
B700-AL001
104
Standard Models
Optical Fiber Products
Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC NET and SYSMAC LINK
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cable with Connectors
System
SYSMAC NET
SYSMAC LINK
Appearance
Appendix A
Model number
S3200-CN jjj
-20-20
S3200-CN jjj
-20-25
S3200-CN jjj -20-62
S3200-CN jjj -25-25
S3200-CN jjj -25-62
S3200-CN jjj -62-62
Model Numbers
The above cable model numbers specify the type of cable, the length, and the type of connectors attached.
S3200-CN jjj
-20-25
1.
2.
3.
1.
S3200-CN specifies H-PCF optical fiber cable.
2.
The boxes ( jjj ) are replaced by codes indicating the standard model lengths, as shown below.
Consult with your OMRON representative for longer cables. When ordering longer cables, omit the portion represented by the boxes and specify the length in meters separately, e.g., S3200-CN-20-20, 30 m.
Code
201
501
102
Length
2 m
5 m
10 m
Code
152
202
Omitted
Length
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m
3.
The last two portions of the model numbers (e.g., 20-25) specify the connectors, as shown below.
20
Code
25
62
Connector
S3200-COCF2011
S3200-COCF2511
S3200-COCH62M
105
Standard Models
Applicable Optical Fiber Connectors
S3200-COCF2011 CV500-SNT31
SYSMAC NET
Appendix A
Applicable Units
SYSMAC LINK
CV500-SLK11
C1000H-SLK11
S3200-COCF2511 C200HS-SNT32 C200HW-SLK13/14
S3200-COCH62M S3200-LSU03-01E
S3200-NSUA1-00E
S3200-NSUG4-00E
S3200-NSB11-E
C500-SNT31-V4
B700-AL001
---
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY
Name
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Optical Connectors A
Optical Connectors B
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Set
Optical Fiber Processing Kit
Specifications
Cable only; order desired length in 5 m increments between 5 and 100 m, or in increments of 200 m or
500 m.
Model number Standards
3G5A2-PF002
Two optical connectors (brown) for APF (10 m max.) 3G5A2-CO001
---
Two optical connectors (black) for APF (8 to 20 m)
1-m cable with an Optical Connector A connected to each end
Accessory: 125-mm nipper (Muromoto Tekko’s 550M) for APF
3G5A2-CO002
3G5A2-PF101
3G2A9-TL101
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY
Name
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber
Specifications
0.1 m, w/connectors
1 m, w/connectors
2 m, w/connectors
3 m, w/connectors
5 m, w/connectors
10 m, w/connectors
20 m, w/connectors
30 m, w/connectors
40 m, w/connectors
50 m, w/connectors
Cable only; order desired length between 1 and 500 m in increments of
1 m.
Cable only; order desired length between 501 and 800 m in increments of 1 m.
Ambient temp:
–10 ° ° to 70 ° ° C
Ambient temp:
0 ° to 55 ° C (do not expose to direct sunlight)
Model number
3G5A2-OF011
3G5A2-OF101
3G5A2-OF201
3G5A2-OF301
3G5A2-OF501
3G5A2-OF111
3G5A2-OF211
3G5A2-OF311
3G5A2-OF411
3G5A2-OF511
3G5A2-OF002
Standards
---
106
Standard Models Appendix A
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cables (For SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, and SYSMAC BUS)
Name
Optical Fiber Cables 10 m, black
50 m, black
100 m, black
500 m, black
1,000 m, black
10 m, orange
50 m, orange
100 m, orange
500 m, orange
1,000 m, orange
Optical Fiber Cables 10 m, black
50 m, black
100 m, black
500 m, black
1000 m, black
10 m, orange
50 m, orange
100 m, orange
500 m, orange
1,000 m, orange
10 m, black
50 m, black
100 m, black
500 m, black
1,000 m, black
Optical Fiber Cable Connector SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
B700-AL001
C500-SNT31-V4
SYSMAC BUS:
Specifications
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
3G2A9jjj
(-P)
Model number
Composite and two-core
S3200-HCLB101
S3200-HCLB501
S3200-HCLB102
S3200-HCLB502
S3200-HCLB103
S3200-HCLO101
S3200-HCLO501
S3200-HCLO102
S3200-HCLO502
S3200-HCLO103
Two-core cable S3200-HCLB101
S3200-HCCB501
S3200-HCCB102
S3200-HCCB502
S3200-HCCB103
S3200-HCCO101
S3200-HCCO501
S3200-HCCO102
S3200-HCCO502
S3200-HCCO103
---
Two-core cord S3200-HBCB101 ---
S3200-HBCB501
S3200-HBCB102
S3200-HBCB502
S3200-HBCB103
S3200-COCH62M --Full-lock connector for NSU,
NSB,, and C500
SYSMAC NET
Link Unit
Half-lock connector for Remote I/O Master, Remote I/O
Slave, Host Link
Unit, and Link
Adapter
Half-lock connector
S3200-COCH82
S3200-COCF2511
---
Standards
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK
C200HS-SNT32
C200HW-SLK13/14
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK
CV500-SNT31
CV500-SLK11
CV1000H-SLK11
To relay at all SYSMAC NET
Full-lock connector
COCF62M and
S3200-COCF2011
S3200-COCF62M used as a pair.
S3200-COCF62F
Note: 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
107
Standard Models Appendix A
2. If the user prepares and connects optical fiber cables, the user must take a seminar held under the auspices of Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and obtain a proper certificate.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber Set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to connect optical fiber cables.
4. You may want to use the Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable/All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable with connectors listed on the previous two pages.
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Name Specifications Model number
S3200-CAK1062 ---
Standards
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool Used to connect H-PCF and crimp-cut connectors for optical transmission systems such as the
SYSMAC C- and CV-series SYSMAC BUS,
SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET.
Note: 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
2. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to connect optical fiber cables.
Optical Power Tester
Name Specifications Head Unit Model number
S3200-CAT2000 ---
Standards
Optical Power Tester (see note)
(provided with a connector adapter, light source unit, small and AC adapter)
SYSMAC NET:
CV500-SNT31
C200HS-SNT32
SYSMAC LINK:
CV500-SLK11
C200HW-SLK13/14
CV1000H-SLK11
SYSMAC BUS:
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4
S3200-CAT200
2 (provided with the Tester)
S3200-CAT270
2 (provided with the Tester)
S3200-CAT282
2 (provided with the Tester)
S3200-CAT320
2 (provided with the Tester)
S3200-CAT2700
S3200-CAT2820
S3200-CAT3200
Note: There is no difference between the light source unit and connector adapter for the Head Unit and those for the Optical Power Tester.
Head Unit
Name
Head Units (a set consisting of light source unit and connector adapter)
Specifications Model number
S3200-CAT2002 ---
Standards
SYSMAC NET:
CV500-SNT31
C200HS-SNT32
SYSMAC LINK:
CV500-SLK11
C200HW-SLK13/14
CV1000H-SLK11
SYSMAC BUS:
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-PV1
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4
S3200-CAT2702
S3200-CAT2822
S3200-CAT3202
108
Standard Models Appendix A
Note: Use a proper Head Unit model for the optical module to be used. If two types of optical modules (unit type and board type) are used, order an Optical Power Tester plus a proper Head Unit model.
Master Fiber Set
Name Specifications Model number
Master Fiber Sets (1 m) S3200-CAT3201 ---
Standards
S3200-CAT3202 (SYSMAC NET, NSB, NSU,
Bridge)
S3200-CAT2002/CAT2702 (SYSMAC NET, SYS-
MAC LINK)
S3200-CAT2822 (SYSMAC BUS)
S3200-CAT2001H
S3200-CAT2821
Note: 1. The Master Fiber Set is used in combination with the Optical Power Tester to check the optical levels of optical fiber cables connected to optical fiber cable connectors.
2. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to connect optical fiber cables.
Programming Devices
Name Specifications Model number
Programming Consoles Hand-Held, w/backlight C200H-PR027-E
Standards
U, C
2-m Connecting Cable included CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console
Mounting Bracket
Used to attach Hand-held Programming Console to a panel.
C200H-ATT01
U, C
---
Programming Console
Connecting Cables
Data Setting Console
For Hand-held Programming Console
2 m
4 m
C200H-CN222
C200H-CN422
Used for data input and process value display for the
C200H-TC jjj , C200H-TV jjj , C200H-CP114, and C200H-PID0 j .
C200H-DSC01
---
---
Data Setting Console
Connecting Cable
For C200H-DSC01
Used to connect an IBM PC/AT or compatible to the C200HX/HG/HE.
2 m
4 m
3.3 m
C200H-CN225
C200H-CN425
CQM1-CIF02 ---
109
Standard Models
Optional Products
Name
I/O Unit Cover
Specifications
Cover for 10-pin terminal block
Appendix A
Model number
C200H-COV11
Standards
---
Terminal Block Covers
Short protection for 10-pin terminal block (package of 10 covers); 8 pts
Connector Cover
C200H-COV02
Short protection for 19-pin terminal block (package of 10 covers); 12 pts
C200H-COV03
Protective cover for unused I/O Connecting Cable connectors C500-COV01
Space Unit Used for vacant slots C200H-SP001 N, L
Battery Set For C200H or C200HS RAM Memory Unit only C200H-BAT09 ---
Relay 24 VDC G6B-1174P-FD-US ---
Backplane InsulaFor C200HW-BC031 (3-slot CPU Backplane)
For C200HW-BC051 (5-slot CPU Backplane)
For C200HW-BC081-V1 (8-slot CPU Backplane)
For C200HW-BC101-V1 (10-slot CPU Backplane)
C200H-ATT31
C200H-ATT51
C200H-ATT81
C200H-ATTA1
For C200HW-BI031 (3-slot I/O Backplane)
For C200HW-BI051 (5-slot I/O Backplane)
For C200HW-BI081-V1 (8-slot I/O Backplane)
For C200HW-BI101-V1 (10-slot I/O Backplane)
C200HW-ATT32
C200HW-ATT52
C200HW-ATT82
C200HW-ATTA2
I/O Brackets For 3-slot Backplane
For 5-slot Backplane
C200H-ATT33
C200H-ATT53
For 8-slot Backplane
For 10-slot Backplane
C200H-ATT83
C200H-ATTA3
External Connectors Solder terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover C500-CE401
Solderless terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Crimp-type) C500-CE402
Pressure welded terminal; 40p C500-CE403
Solder terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Horizontal-type) C500-CE404
Crimp-style terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Horizontaltype)
C500-CE405
---
N
---
---
---
---
---
---
110
Standard Models
Mounting Rails and Accessories
Specification s Name
DIN Track Mounting
Bracket
1 set (2 included)
DIN Tracks
End Plate
Spacer
Length: 50 cm; height: 7.3 cm
Length: 1 m; height: 7.3 cm
Length: 1 m; height: 16 mm
---
---
Model number
C200H-DIN01
Standards
---
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
PFP-100N2
PFP-M
PFP-S
Appendix A
Note: Order DIN Tracks, End Plates, and Spacers in units of 10 each.
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
Name Specifications Model number
---
Standards
SYSMAC Support Software (for C20, C jj P,
C jj K, C120, C jj H,
C200H, C200HS,
C200HE, C200HG,
C200HX, C500, C1000H,
C2000H, CQM1, and
CVM1)
Protocol Support Software
Name
Protocol Support Software
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
Note: Version 1.0 doesn’t support the additional functions of the C200HX/HG/HE.
C500-ZL3AT1-E
Specifications
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
Model number
C200HW-ZW3AT1-E ---
Standards
Training Materials
Name
SYSMAC Training System
Fuzzy Training System
Specifications Model number
Includes text book, cassette tape, and input switch board.
Includes a Fuzzy Training System Manual, a Main
Unit, a C200H-MR831 Memory Unit, a
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console, a
C200H-CN222 Cable for the Programming Console, C500-SU981-E Fuzzy Training Software, an
RS-232C Cable, and a carrying belt.
C200H-ETL01-E
C200H-ETL13-E
---
Standards
---
111
Appendix B
Specifications
The following figures and tables provide specifications for each Unit of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. I/O Units may take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as A-shape Units or B-shape Units.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as C-shape
Units or D-shape Units. Refer to the figures at the end of the I/O Unit specifications for the exact dimensions of these two shapes of I/O Unit.
General Specifications
Item
Power Supply
Unit
Supply voltage
Operating voltage range
Power consumption
Inrush current
Output capacity
30 A max.
5 VDC, 4.6 A (including power supply to the CPU Unit)
30 A max. at 100 to 120 VAC
40 A at 200 to
240 VAC
5 VDC, 9 A
(including power supply to the CPU
Unit)
26 VDC, 1.3 A
Total: 45 W
Output terminals
RUN output
(see note 5)
Insulation resistance
26 VDC, 0.625 A
Total: 30 W
Without
26 VDC, 0.625 A
24 VDC, 0.8 A
Total: 30 W
With
(see note 1)
26 VDC, 0.625 A
Total: 30 W
Without
Without SPST-NO contact SPST-NO contact
Switching capacity:
2 A at 250 VAC
(resistive load),
0.5 A at 250 VAC
(inductive load),
2 A at 24 VDC
Switching capacity:
2 A at 240 VAC
(resistive load),
0.5 A at 120 VAC
(inductive load),
2 A at 24 VDC
(resistive load), 2
A at 24 VDC
(inductive load)
AC: 20 M Ω min. (at 500 VDC) between external terminals and GR terminal
(see note 2)
Dielectric strength
C200HW-PA204
100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
85 to 132 VAC/170 to 264 VAC
120 VA max.
C200HW-PA204S
Specifications
C200HW-PA204R C200H-PA209R
180 VA max.
AC: 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminals and GR terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 2)
C200HW-PD024
24 VDC
19.2 to 28.8 VDC
40 W max.
30 A max.
5 VDC, 4.6 A
(including power supply to the CPU
Unit)
26 VDC, 0.625 A
Total: 30 W
Without
Without
DC: 20 M Ω min.
(at 500 VDC) between external terminals and GR terminal (see note
2)
DC: 2,300 VAC,
50/60 Hz for 1 minute between
DC: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminals and GR terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 2) and GR terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 2)
113
Specifications Appendix B
Power Supply
Unit
C200HW-PA204 C200HW-PA204S C200HW-PA204R C200H-PA209R C200HW-PD024
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
1,500 Vp-p, pulse width: 100 ns to 1 µ s, rise time: 1 ns pulse (by noise simulator)
JIS C0040 conforming,10 to 57 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz (see note 3); acceleration:
9.8 m/s
2
, in X, Y, and Z directions, for 80 minutes each (sweep time 8 min x 10 sweeps = 80 min);
(When mounted on DIN track, 2 to 55 Hz, 2.94 m/s 2 , in X, Y, and Z directions, for 20 minutes each)
Shock resistance JIS C0041 conforming, 147 m/s 2 in X, Y, and Z directions, 3 times each
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 ° to 55 ° C; storage: –20 ° to 75 ° C (without battery)
Humidity
Atmosphere
10% to 90% (without condensation)
Grounding
Must be free of the following:
•
Corrosive gases
•
Abrupt temperature changes
•
Direct sunlight
•
Dust, salt, or metal filings
•
Water, oil, or chemicals
Class 3 ground
Enclosure rating
Weight
Dimensions (CPU
Racks)
(See note 4.)
Mounted in a panel
6 kg max.
2-slot Rack:
3-slot Rack:
5-slot Rack:
8-slot Rack:
10-slot Rack:
198.5 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
260 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
330 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
435 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
505 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
Note: If the C200HW-PA209R is used, D will be 153 mm in the above dimensions.
Note 1. The output voltage of the 24-VDC output will vary with the current consumption of the load as shown in the following table. Be sure to check the current consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before using these terminals. (The combined power consumption for 5 V, 26 V, and 24
V (24-VDC output on PA204S) must be 30 W or less.)
Less than 0.3 A 0.3 A or higher Load current on 24-VDC output
Accuracy of 24-VDC output for lot No. 0197 or later
Accuracy of 24-VDC output for lot No. 3187 or earlier
+17%
–11%
+10%
–20%
+10%
–11%
Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
0 1 9 7
1997 (Rightmost digit of year)
September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
01 (Day: 01 to 31)
2. Internal components can be damaged if insulation resistance or dielectric strength tests are conducted with the LG and GR terminals connected.
114
Specifications
3. Vibration Resistance
Acceleration (m/s 2 )
9.8
10 57
Amplitude
0.075 mm
150
Frequency (Hz)
4. Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Appendix B
5. RUN output is only available when the Power Supply Unit is mounted on the CPU Backplane.
115
Specifications Appendix B
CPU Unit Specifications
Control Method Stored program
I/O Control
Method
Programming
Method
Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
Ladder diagram
Instruction Length 1 address/instruction, 1 to 4 words/instruction
Number of
Instructions
Execution Time
C200HE-CPU jj -E: 14 basic instructions + 231 special instructions
C200HE-CPU jj -ZE: 14 basic instructions + 286 special instructions
Basic instructions: C200HE-CPU jj
-E/ZE: 0.3
µ s min.
C200HG-CPU jj -E/ZE: 0.15 µ s min.
C200HX-CPU jj -E/ZE: 0.1 µ s min.
Special instructions: C200HE-CPU jj -E/ZE: 1.2 µ s min.
C200HG-CPU jj -E/ZE: 0.6 µ s min.
C200HX-CPU jj -E/ZE: 0.4 µ s min.
Program Capacity C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE: 3.2K words max.
C200HE-CPU32-E/42-E/ZE: 7.2K words max.
C200HG-CPU jj -E/ZE: 15.2K words max.
C200HX-CPU j 4-E/ZE:
C200HX-CPU j
5-ZE:
31.2K words max.
36.2K words max.
IR Area: I/O bits 640 bits (00000 through 02915, 30000 through 30915)
IR Area: Work bits 6,528 bits (03000 through 23515, 31000 through 51115)
SR bits 1,016 (23600 through 25507 and 25600 through 29915)
TR bits
HR bits
8 (TR 0 through 7)
1,600 (HR 0000 through 9915)
AR bits
LR bits
Timers/Counters
DM words
Expansion DM
448 (AR 0000 through 2715)
1,024 (LR 0000 through 6315)
512 (TIM/CNT 000 through 511)
Read/write: 6,144 (DM 0000 through 6143)
Read only: 512 (DM 6144 through 6655)
3,000 words max. (DM 7000 through 9999)
Read/write
C200HE-CPU jj -E/ZE: None
C200HG-CPU jj
-E/ZE: 6,144 words (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU jj -E/ZE: 6,144 words × 3 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE: 6,144 words
×
8 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE: 6,144 words
×
16 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
Holds HR, AR, CNT, and DM, EM and clock (RTC) contents.
Power Failure
Backup Function
Memory Backup
Time
Self-diagnostic
Function
Program Check
Function
The battery service life is five years at 25 ° C. The service life will be shortened if the battery is used at higher temperatures.
Replace the battery within one week after the battery alarm indicator starts blinking. When replacing the battery, install the new battery within five minutes after removing the old one.
CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, host link errors, memory errors, battery errors,
I/O bus errors, remote I/O errors, etc.
Carries out program checks at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction, instruction errors, and so on.
116
Specifications Appendix B
RS-232C Port Specifications
RS-232C Specifications
1
5
6
9
The specifications for the RS-232C port are given below. Devices that meet these specifications can be connected.
Connector Pin Assignments
Pin assignments for the RS-232C port are given in the following table.
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
Pin Abbreviation
FG
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
5V
DR (DSR)
8
9
ER (DTR)
SG
Connector fitting FG
Name
Field ground
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Power supply
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
Field ground
Direction
---
Output
Input
Output
Input
---
Input
Output
---
---
Connections
The connections between the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE and a personal computer are illustrated below as an example.
C200HE/C200HG/C200HX
Signal
FG
SD
Pin
No.
1
2
RD
RS
CS
3
4
5
5V
DR
ER
SG
8
9
6
7
Personal Computer
Pin
No.
1
2
Signal
CD
RD
3
4
5
6
7
8
SD
ER
SG
DR
RS
CS
CI
Shielded cable
Applicable Connectors
The following connectors are applicable. One plug and one hood are included with the CPU Unit.
Plug: XM2S-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0911 (OMRON) or equivalent
Port Specifications
Item
Communications method
Sync
Baud rate
Transmission method
Transmission distance
Interface
Specification
Half duplex
Start-stop
1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Point to point
15 m max.
EIA RS-232C
117
Specifications Appendix B
One-to-one Link Connections The RS-232C port on the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be connected to the same port on another C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. Wire the cable as shown in the diagram below.
C200HE/C200HG/C200HX C200HE/C200HG/C200HX
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG
Signal
Abb.
FG
SD
RD
RS
8
9
5
6
7
Pin
No.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
Pin
No.
3
4
1
2
Signal
Abb.
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
DR
ER
SG
Ground the FG terminals of C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Units at a resistance of less than 100 Ω .
118
Specifications
C200H Standard I/O Units
Appendix B
Name
DC Input Units 8 pts
AC Input Unit
Specifications
12 to 24 VDC
16 pts 24 VDC
8 pts 100 to 120 VAC
16 pts 100 to 120 VAC
8 pts 200 to 240 VAC
Transistor
Interrupt Input Unit 1
Standard B7A Interface
Analog Timer Unit
U i
Variable Resistor Connector
Model number
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122/IA122V B
C200H-IA221 A
B
A
A
Shape
16 pts
8 pts
200 to 240 VAC
12 to 24 VAC/DC
16 pts 24 VAC/DC
8 pts
12 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
C200H-IA222/IA222V B
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
A
B
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC225
A
B
A 5 pts
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
12 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC222V
16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC226
B
C200H-OC224V
Extended
B-shape
B 8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
8 pts 1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
12 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC
16 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC
8 pts
8 pts
2.1 A, 24 VDC
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection
8 pts 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
12 pts 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
16 pts 1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection
8 pts
8 pts
1 A, 250 VAC
1.2 A 250 VAC
12 pts 0.3 A, 250 VAC
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212 2
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD21A
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA222V
A
B
A
B
A
E
B
12 pts 0.5 A, 250 VAC
8 pts 12 to 24 VDC
16 input pts
16 output pts
Connects to B7A Link Terminals.
4 timers 0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10 min (switchable)
Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor
C200H-OA224
C200HS-INT01
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
C200H-TM001
C4K-CN223
---
Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. Use a C200HW-BC jj
1 Backplane.
2. The Unit can overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.
119
Specifications Appendix B
Optional Products
Name
I/O Unit Cover
Connector Cover
Space Unit
Specifications
Terminal cover for 8-point or 5-point I/O Units
Protective cover for unused Backplane connectors
Used to hold space for an I/O Unit.
Model number
C200H-COV11
C500-COV01
C200H-SP001
Note 1. When ordering, specify the model name (any component of which is not sold separately).
2. Order the press-fit tool from the manufacturer.
Standard I/O Units
DC Input Unit C200H-ID211
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
12 to 24 VDC
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
2 k
W
10 mA (at 24 VDC)
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
3.0 VDC max.
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
1 (8 point/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
200 g max.
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
12 to 24 VDC
COM
2 k
W
0.01
m
F
1.8
k
W
Internal
Circuit
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
12 to 24 VDC
COM
NC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
120
Specifications
DC Input Unit C200H-ID212
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
3 k W
7 mA (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
IN
COM
3 k
W
0.01
m
F
1.8
k
W
Internal
Circuit
24 VDC
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
COM
1
A0
3
A1
5
A2
7
A3
9
A4
11
15
A5
13
A6
A7
A8
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7
14
B8
B9
NC
NC
121
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA121
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
9.7 k W (50 Hz), 8 k W (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
60 VAC min.
20 VAC max.
35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25 ° C)
55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25 ° C)
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
100 to
120 VAC
IN
COM
0.33 m
F 470
W
330 k W
910
W
Internal
Circuit
Terminal Connections
100 to
120 VAC
Input indicator
COM
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
NC
0
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
122
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA122/IA122V
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
9.7 k W (50 Hz), 8 k W (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
60 VAC min.
20 VAC max.
35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25 ° C)
55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25 ° C)
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max./400 g max. (IA122V)
Dimensions B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
100 to
120 VAC
IN
COM
0.33 m
F 470
W
330 k W
910
W
Internal
Circuit
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
100 to
120 VAC
1
7
9
11
3
5
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B8
A8
B9
0
B0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7
14
NC
NC
123
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA221
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
21 k W (50 Hz), 18 k W (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
120 VAC min.
40 VAC max.
35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25 ° C)
55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25 ° C)
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
200 to
240 VAC
IN
COM
0.15 m
F 820
Ω
680 k W
910
Ω
Internal
Circuit
Terminal Connections
200 to
240 VAC
Input indicator
COM
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
NC
0
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
124
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA222/IA222V
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
21 k W (50 Hz), 18 k W (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
120 VAC min.
40 VAC max.
35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25 ° C)
55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25 ° C)
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max./400 g max. (IA222V)
Dimensions B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
200 to
240 VAC
IN
COM
0.15 m
F 680 Ω
680 k
W
910
Ω
Internal
Circuit
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
200 to
240 VAC
1
7
9
11
3
5
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B8
A8
B9
0
B0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7
14
NC
NC
125
Specifications
AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM211
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
12 to 24 VDC
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
2 k W
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
10.2 VDC min.
3.0 VDC max.
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
IN
2 k
W
12 to
24 VAC/DC
COM
0.01
m
F
1.8
k
W
Input indicator
Internal
Circuit
Terminal Connections
12 to
24 VAC/DC
COM
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
NC
0
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
126
Specifications
AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM212
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
3 k W
7 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
Appendix B
IN
3 k
W
COM
0.01
m
F
1.8
k
W
24 VAC/DC
Input indicator
Internal
Circuit
Terminal Connections
24 VAC/DC
1
A0
3
5
A1
A2
7
9
A3
A4
COM
11
13
A5
A6
15
A7
A8
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7
14
B8
B9
NC
NC
127
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC221
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
0
1
A0
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
7
A6
A7
COM
A8
A9
NC
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
128
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
NC
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B6
A7
B8
A8
B7
B9
0
B0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
NC
NC
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
129
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC225
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 50 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight
Dimensions
400 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7 14
A7
A8
B8
B9
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
Note This Unit can overheat if more than 8 output points are turned ON simultaneously.
130
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC223
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (10 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 5 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape
Circuit Configuration
Internal
Circuit
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUTc
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A)
(10 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
0 c0
A0
1
A1
A2 c1
2
A3 c2
A4
A5
3 c3
4
A6
A7
A8 c4
A9
131
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Internal
Circuit
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUTc
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A)
(16 A/Unit) c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7
NC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B0
0
1
B1
2
B2
3
B3
4
B4
5
B5
6
B6
7
B7
A7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
132
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222V
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 8 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight
Dimensions
400 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
NC
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
0
B0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
A5
B6
NC
A6
A7
B7
B8
NC
NC
A8
B9
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
133
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC226
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 30 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight
Dimensions
500 g max.
Extended B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7 14
A7
A8
B8
B9
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
134
Specifications Appendix B
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224V
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay
2 A 250 VAC (cos f = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cos f =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Weight 350 g max.
Dimensions B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Internal
Circuit
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUTc
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A)
(16 A/Unit) c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7
NC
B0
A0
B1
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
135
Specifications Appendix B
Life Expectancy of Contact Output Unit
The C200H-OC221/222/223/224/225 Contact Output Unit uses OMRON’s G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay. The life of the G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay varies with the contact current and ambient temperature. Refer to the following graphs to calculate this value, and be sure to replace the Relays before their service life expires.
Contact Current vs. Life Expectancy
Conditions
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.
Ambient temperature: 23
°
C
Ambient Temperature vs. Life
Expectancy
Conditions
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.
OMRON’s H3BA
Timer (200 VAC)
OMRON’s MA415A
Contactor (200 VAC)
30 VDC, L/R = 40 ms
(electromagnetic valve)
250 VAC, cos
φ
= 0.4
30 VDC, L/R = 7 ms
(HK, MM, and MY
Hinge-type Relay)
250 VAC, cos
φ
=
130 VDC, L/R = 0
2 A at 250 VAC, resistive load
2 A at 30 VDC, resistive load
1 A at 250 VAC, resistive load
1 A at 30 VDC, resistive load
OMRON’s
MY4 Relay
(200 VAC)
Electromagnetic valve (250 VAC, cos
φ
= 0.08 to
0.1)
1 A at 250 VAC, inductive load
(cos
φ
= 0.4)
1 A at 30 VDC, inductive load
(L/R = 7 ms)
2 A at 250 VAC, inductive load (cos φ = 0.4)
2 A at 30 VDC, inductive load (L/R = 7 ms)
Contact current (normal current) (A) Ambient temperature ( ° C)
Note 1. If the Contact Output Unit is panel-mounted, the temperature inside the panel represents the ambient temperature.
2. The life of the Relay at an ambient temperature of 55
°
C is one-fifth the life of the Relay at room temperature (0
°
to 40
°
C).
Inductive Load
The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance. If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output Unit, use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load.
Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output Unit.
Contact Protection Circuit
Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Unit in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Contact
Output Unit, prevent noise, and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits. Arc killers can, however, reduce relay life if not use correctly.
Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay mounted to the Contact Output Unit.
136
Specifications Appendix B
Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table.
Circuit
CR method
Power supply
Diode method
Power supply
Varistor method
Power supply
Current Characteristic
AC DC
Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is a time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert the arc killer in parallel with the load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the arc killer between the contacts.
No Yes The diode connected in parallel with the load changes energy accumulated by the coil into a current, which then flows into the coil so that the current will be converted into Joule heat by the resistance of the inductive load.
This time lag, between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset, caused by this method is longer than that caused by the CR method.
Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the imposition of high voltage between the contacts by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor. There is time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert the varistor in parallel with the load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the contacts.
Required element
The capacitance of the capacitor must be 1 to 0.5 µ F per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of
1 V. These values, however, vary with the load and the characteristics of the relay. Decide these values from experiments, and take into consideration that the capacitance suppresses spark discharge when the contacts are separated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load when the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no polarity.
The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode must be at least 10 times as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must be the same as or larger than the load current.
The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode may be two to three times larger than the supply voltage if the arc killer is applied to electronic circuits with low circuit voltages.
---
Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following diagram. This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is opened. However when the contacts are closed, the contacts may be welded due to the current charged in the capacitor.
DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads. If appropriate arc killers are used, however, DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads.
Power supply
137
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD411
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
12 to 48 VDC 1 A (3 A/Unit)
None
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
30 mA 12 to 48 VDC min.
250 g max.
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
Fuse blowout detection circuit
12 to
48 VDC
Fuse: GSS (Nagasawa)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
F indicator
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
12 to 48 VDC
(1 A max., 3 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM (0 V)
0
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
12 to 48 VDC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
138
Specifications
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD211
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
0.3 A 24 VDC +10% /
–15%
(2 A/Unit)
None
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 160 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
25 mA 24 VDC
+10%
/
–15% min.
300 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+ V
Output indicator
OUT
L
24 VDC
Internal
Circuit Fuse COM
Appendix B
Fuse: GGS (Nagasawa)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
NC
COM (0 V)
1
3
5
7
9
11
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B6
A6
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B7
NC
NC
A7
A8
B8
B9
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
+ 24 VDC
Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
139
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD212
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
0.3 A 24 VDC +10% /
–15%
(4.8 A/Unit)
None
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
35 mA 24 VDC
+10%
/
–15%
min.
350 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+ V
Output indicator
OUT
L
24 VDC
Internal
Circuit Fuse COM
Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (Nagasawa)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
(0.3 A max )
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
11
13
15
COM (0 V)
3
5
7
9
1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
12
B7
14
A7
A8
B8
B9
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
+ 24 VDC
Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
140
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD213
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
2.1 A 24 VDC +10% /
–15%
(5.2 A/Unit) NPN output
None
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
30 mA 24 VDC
+10%
/
–15%
min.
250 g max.
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+ V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit Fuse
Fuse blowout detection circuit
COM
24 VDC
Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (Nagasawa)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
F indicator
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
(2.1 A max., 5.2 A/Unit)
0
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM (0 V)
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
24 VDC
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
141
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD214
(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
24 VDC +10% /
–15%
0.8 A (2.4 A/Unit) surge current
2 A (source type) PNP output
None
1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
1 ms max.
1 ms max.
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating Short-circuit protection Overcurrent protection
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
Thermal protection
150 mA 24 VDC +10% /
–15%
min.
250 g max.
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
+ V
Source
Driver
Internal
Circuit
Reset button
+
OUT
L
24 VDC
COM
Alarm Output indicator
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
(0.8 A max., 2.4 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM (0 V)
24 VDC
0
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
A3
A4
A5
A6
A0
A1
A2
A7
A8
A9
Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
142
Specifications Appendix B
C200H-OD214 Short-Circuit Protection
The C200H-OD214 Output Unit is equipped with two types of short-circuit protection: overcurrent protection and thermal protection. Any short-circuit must be eliminated immediately in order to avoid damage to the Unit.
Overcurrent Protection
When the output current reaches 2 A, the alarm output turns ON, and the alarm indicator lights. Make sure the surge current of the load does not exceed 2 A, or the alarm may be activated.
Thermal Protection
When the junction temperature of the output transistor reaches its upper limit, the output turns OFF, the alarm output turns ON, and the alarm indicator blinks. But the output transistor is provided with a heat sink. So in some cases, when the output is short-circuited the thermal protection may not activate because the extra heat is dissipated by the heat sink. However, the alarm indicator will still light and the alarm output will still turn ON.
How It Works
When the short-circuit protection activates, the output displays the characteristic shown below.
Output
Voltage
Overcurrent limit alarm output point
0 Output current:
2 A (minimum value)
Each pair of outputs share one alarm indicator and one alarm output bit as shown below (bits 12 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits)
Output No.
Alarm indicator No.
Alarm Output Point No.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 2 4 6
08 09 10 11
Both the alarm indicator and alarm output bit for the short-circuited output turn ON even if only one of the outputs is short-circuited. Both outputs should be disconnected until the short-circuit can be traced.
Clearing the Alarm
When the short-circuit has been eliminated, reset the Unit by pressing the reset button. The alarm indicator will go out, the alarm output will turn OFF, and the output will be reset.
Output indicator
Alarm indicator
Reset button (use a screwdriver or other similar object to press it).
Programming Example
If there is a short-circuit in an output, we want the program to turn that output OFF. Assume that the Unit is mounted at word 000. A program to turn OFF output bits 00 and 01 is shown below.
A 00008
00000
B 00008
00001
Since alarm output bit 08 covers both output bits 00 and 01, both these outputs are forced OFF as soon as output bit 08 turns ON (bits A and B can be any other bits required in the program).
143
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD216
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
10 mA 5 VDC
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
1.5 ms max.
2 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common) positive common (source type)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
None
N/A
Weight
Dimensions
250 g max.
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
Internal
Circuit
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
5 to 24 VDC
COM
Terminal Connections
5 to 24 VDC
L
0
A0
L
1
A1
L
2
A2
L
3
A3
L
4
A4
L
5
A5
L
6
A6
L
7
A7
COM A8
NC A9
144
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD217
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
10 mA 5 VDC
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
1.5 ms max.
2 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) positive common (source type)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON simultaneously.)
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
None
N/A
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Internal
Circuit
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
5 to
24 VDC
COM
Terminal Connections
5 to 24 VDC
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
NC
A0
B0
B1
A1
B2
A2
A3
B3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
B7
B8
COM A8
B9
0
2
4
6
8
10
NC
NC
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
145
Specifications Appendix B
C200H-OD21A Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sourcing)
(Load Circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
24 VDC +10%
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
/
–15%
, 1.0 A (4 A/Unit)
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
0.1 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 160 mA 5 VDC max.
Load Short-circuit Protection
Power for External Supply
Weight
Alarm Output (See note 1.)
Reset Input
Detection current: 1.2 A min (1.6 A typical)
35 mA 24 VDC
+10%
/
–15%
min.
400 g max.
No. of outputs: 1 (2 k Ω internal resistor)
Connectable Units: Only the following DC Input
Units can be connected:
C200H-ID001, ID211, ID212, IM211 (DC), IM212
(DC), ID215, ID501, MD115, MD215, MD501
Used when alarm output turns ON. Value will depend on the external power supply. (See note 2.)
Load Short-circuit Protection
Dimensions
Detection current: 1.2 A min.
(1.6 A typical)
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
2 k Ω
0 V to
Note When short-circuit/overload protection is activated, all 16 outputs will be switched OFF and the ALARM output becomes active (low level). The problem can be detected externally by connecting a DC Input Unit to the ALARM output or by connecting an alarm output indicator. It’s not possible to connect both the Input Unit and the indicator at the same time. Unless the external I/O power supply is connected and turned ON, the indicator will not light even if the output contact turns ON.
146
Specifications
Terminal Connections
Appendix B
+24 VDC
0 V
24 VDC
Note When the ALARM output turns ON, remove the cause of the high current and then shut off the external power supply for approx. 1 second. After confirming that the cause has been removed, turn ON the power supply again to reset the output. As shown in the diagram, it is recommended that a relay or switch that turns
ON or OFF only the external power supply be connected right before the B9 (+V). Check that this relay or switch has a contact capacity higher than the external power supply current consumption (35 mA + load current minimum).
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA122-E
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
1.2 A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC min.
1.5 mA (120 VAC) max.
1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
E-shape
147
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Appendix B
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
120 VAC max.
Fuse blowout detection circuit
F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20) GGS (Nagasawa)
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
120 VAC max.
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
NC
2
3
0
1
4
5
6
7
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
148
Specifications Appendix B
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA221
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
1 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load) 10
VAC
3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
1.2 V max.
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency or less.
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight
Dimensions
250 g max.
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse blowout detection circuit
F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MF51SH (JIS)
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC max
(1 A max. 4 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
2
3
0
1
4
5
6
7
NC
A6
A7
A8
A9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
149
Specifications Appendix B
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA222V
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
0.3 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load)
10 VAC
3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
1.2 V max.
1/2 of load frequency or less
1/2 of load frequency or less.
1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 200 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight
Dimensions
400 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse: 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MQ4 (SOC)
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC max.
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
NC
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B7
A7
B6
B8
0
B0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
NC
NC
NC
A8
B9
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
150
Specifications Appendix B
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA223
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
1.2 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC min.
1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
N/A
300 g max.
E-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse blowout detection circuit
F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) HT (SOC)
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC max.
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
NC
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
151
Specifications Appendix B
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA224
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. inrush current
Min. Switching Capacity
0.5 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
10 A (pulse width: 100ms)
20 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC min.
1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
1.5 VAC max. (50 to 500 mA)/5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency + 1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
N/A
300 g max.
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse: 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MT4 (SOC)
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
250 VAC max.
(0.5 A max., 2 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
L
L
5
7
9
1
3
11
NC
NC
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B6
A7
B8
A8
B7
B9
0
B0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
NC
NC
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
152
Specifications
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
In the following diagrams, “m” is the first word allocated to the Unit in PC memory.
DC Input Unit C200H-ID111 (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
12 VDC +10%
3.0 VDC max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
/
–15%
10.2 to 13.2 VDC
2.7 k W
4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
8.0 VDC min.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
250 g max.
D-shape
Circuit Configuration
CN1
CN2
A
B
A
B
IN15
COM
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
COM
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
COM
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
COM
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
2.7 k W
2.7 k
W
1000 pF
820
W
1000 pF
820
W
CN1
SW
CN2
Input indicator
Internal
Circuit
Indicator switch circuit
Internal
Circuit
Appendix B
153
Specifications Appendix B
Terminal Connections
12 VDC
+
12 VDC
+
I/O word “m+1”
NC
COM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
B
20
19
18
17
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
CN1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
16
15
14
13
A
I/O word “m”
20
19
18
17
NC
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
9
8
11
10
7
6
5
4
COM
3
2
1
0
+
12 VDC
+
12 VDC
CN2
12 VDC
12 VDC
+
+
I/O word “m+2”
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
NC
NC
A
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
17
18
19
20
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
B
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
17
18
19
20
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
I/O word “m+3”
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
COM
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
+
+
12 VDC
12 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number). For the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HX/C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the I/O word is as follows;
0 to 9 Unit: m= IR 030 + 2
×
I/O number
A to F Unit: m= IR 330 + 2
×
(I/O number – A)
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector are connected internally.
154
Specifications Appendix B
DC Input Unit C200H-ID216 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
5.6 k W
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
1 (32 points/common)
All 32 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 180 g max.
Dimensions C-shape
Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points
32
30
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC
A
COM
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
5.6 k
W
1000 pF
680
W
Input indicator
25
20
Internal
Circuit
15
B
COM
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
5.6 k
W
1000 pF
680
W
Input indicator
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40
Ambient Temperature ( ° C)
50 55 60
155
Specifications Appendix B
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
24 VDC
+
+
I/O word “m”
COM
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
A
1
2
12
13
14
15
COM
10
11
8
9
NC
NC
15
16
17
18
19
20
B
I/O word “m+1”
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
COM
9
8
10
9
11
10
12
11
13
12
14
13
15
14
16
15
17
COM
18
19
20
NC
NC
+
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2
×
I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals.
Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected internally.
DC Input Unit C200H-ID217 (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
5.6 k W
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
2 (32 points/common)
All 64 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape
156
Specifications Appendix B
Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points
COM
1000 pF
IN00 Internal
Circuit
A IN07
COM
IN08 5.6 k W
680
W
IN15
COM
IN00
CN1
SW
CN2
Indicator switch circuit
B
IN07
COM
IN08
Input indicator
IN15
COM
IN00 1000 pF
Internal
Circuit
A
IN07
COM
IN08
680
W
5.6 k
W
IN15
COM
IN00
B
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
64
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC
10 20 30 40
Ambient Temperature ( ° C)
50 55 60
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word “m+1”
B A
24 VDC
24 VDC
+
+
NC
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
20
19
18
17
16
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
I/O word “m”
9
8
11
10
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
20
19
18
17
16
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
NC
COM
+
24 VDC
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
+
+
I/O word “m+2”
COM
7
5
6
2
3
4
0
1
12
13
14
15
COM
10
11
8
9
NC
NC
CN2
A B
16
17
18
19
20
12
13
14
15
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
3
4
1
2
16
17
18
19
20
12
13
14
15
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
3
4
1
2
I/O word “m+3”
2
3
4
0
1
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
+
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2
×
I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector are connected internally.
157
Specifications Appendix B
DC Input Unit C200H-ID218
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
24 VDC +10% /
–15%
3.9 k Ω
6 mA (at 24 VDC)
15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
32 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simultaneously is limited according to the ambient temperature. Refer to the following diagram for details.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 180 g max.
Circuit Configuration
Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
Input voltage: 24.0 VDC to
0.01 µ F
3.9 k
Ω
470 Ω
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC to
Input LED indicator
0.01 µ F to
3.9 k Ω
470 Ω to
Input LED indicator
Ambient temperature
Terminal Connections m words m + 1 words
24 VDC 24 VDC
24 VDC 24 VDC
Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons, however, must be the same.
158
Specifications Appendix B
2. COM terminals must all be wired even though they are connected internally.
DC Input Unit C200H-ID219
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
24 VDC +10% /
–15%
3.9 k Ω
6 mA (at 24 VDC)
15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
1.0 ms max.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
1.0 ms max.
64 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simultaneously is limited according to the ambient temperature. Refer to the following diagram for details.
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Circuit Configuration to
0.01
µ
F
3.9 k Ω
470 Ω to to to
Input LED indicator
0.01 µ F to to
3.9 k Ω
470 Ω to
Input LED indicator
Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
Input voltage: 20.4 VDC
Input voltage: 24.0 VDC
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC to
Ambient temperature
159
Specifications
Terminal Connections
(m + 1) words
24 VDC
(m + 1) words (m + 2) words
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
(m + 3) words
24 VDC
24 VDC
Appendix B
Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons for
CN1 and CN2, however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals for CN1 and CN2 must all be wired even though they are connected internally.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD218 (32 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
None
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
0.1 ms max.
0.4 ms max.
1 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3.5 A (The fuse is not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
110 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
180 g max.
C-shape
160
Specifications Appendix B
Circuit Configuration and Maximum Switching Capacity
Units manufactured on or before January 28th, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
Fuse blowout detection circuit
Output indicator
Output indicator
F indicator
Fuse
(3.5 A)
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
A
B
100
50
16
0
0 4.5
10 20.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
26.4
Units manufactured on or after January 31st, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 3110 or later*)
Internal
Circuit
Fuse blowout detection circuit
Output indicator
Output indicator
F indicator
Fuse
(3.5 A)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
4.5 to 26.4
VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
*Manufacturing Numbers jj Y9
A
B
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999 → 9, 2000 → 0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
161
Specifications Appendix B
Terminal Connections
+
+
I/O word “m”
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
L
COM
15
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
18
19
20
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
A
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
7
8
9 9
10 10
5
6
3
4
B
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I/O word “m+1”
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM
+
+
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2
×
I/O number).
2. When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number is turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214. For the C200HX/C200HG/C200HX/
C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the following AR and IR bits turn ON;
0 to 9 Unit: AR 0205 to AR 0214 and IR 28000 to IR 28009 turn ON.
A to F Unit: IR 28010 to IR 28015 turn ON.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected internally.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
162
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD219 (64 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
None
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
0.1 ms max.
0.4 ms max.
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
Two 3.5 A fuses (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
220 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
250 g max.
D-shape
163
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before January 28th, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
COM
Fuse
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
Indicator switch/ fuse blowout detection circuit
F indicator
SW
Output indicator
CN1
CN2
OUT15
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
CN1
CN2
Appendix B
Units manufactured on or after January 31st, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 3110 or later*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
COM
Indicator switch/ fuse blowout detection circuit
F indicator
SW
Output indicator
CN1
CN2
Fuse
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
Fuse
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
*Manufacturing Numbers jj Y9
CN1
CN2
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999
→
9, 2000
→
0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
164
Specifications Appendix B
Maximum Switching Capacity
100
50
6.4
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
16
0
0 4.5
10 20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
Terminal Connections
CN1
+
+
I/O word “m+1”
COM
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
B
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
A
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I/O word “m”
COM
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
9
8
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+
+
1.0
0
0 10 20 30 40 505560
Ambient Temperature ( ° C)
CN2
+
+
I/O word “m+2”
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
L
COM
15
A B
18
19
20
12
13
14
15
8
9
8
9
10 10
11 11
16
17
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
I/O word “m+3”
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM
+
+
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When either fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number is turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector are connected internally.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
165
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD21B (32 Points)
(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Current
Min. Switching Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
0.5 A 24 VDC +10%
None
0.1 mA max.
/
–15%
(5 A/Unit)
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight
Alarm Indicator
0.8 V max.
0.1 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 32 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
One 7 A fuse (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
160 mA 24 VDC
+10%
/
–15%
(5 mA
×
number of ON pts)
min.
180 g max.
Lamp F lights (unless fuse is broken).
Load Short-circuit Prevention
(see note 1)
Dimensions
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance.
C-shape
Note When the short-circuit/overload protection is activated for a contact point, the output for that point is turned
OFF. At the same time, lamp “F” lights up, and the alarm from AR0205 to AR0214 corresponding to the I/O number turns ON. After the cause of the error has been removed, the alarm will be cleared automatically when the internal temperature of the element drops.
Circuit Configuration
Output LED indicator
Alarm
LED indicator
Output LED indicator to
0 V to
0 V to
0 V to
0 V
166
Specifications
Terminal Connections
I/O word “m”
24 VDC
I/O word “m+1”
24 VDC
Appendix B
24 VDC
24 VDC
High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
TTL Input Unit C200H-ID501 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
5 VDC
4.5 to 5.5 VDC
1.1 k
W
3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
1.0 VDC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
4 (8 points/common) No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
CN1
COM0
IN00
IN07
COM1
IN08
IN15
2.4 k W
1.1 k W
Internal
Circuit
CN2
COM2
IN00
IN07
COM3
IN08
IN15
2.4 k
W
1.1 k
W
167
Specifications Appendix B
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word “n”
CN2
I/O word “n+1”
NC
B
12
A
12
NC
0
A B
8
1 1
NC
11 11
NC
1
2 2
9
NC
COM1
15
10
9
8
10
9
8
NC
COM0
7
5 VDC
+
2
3
4
3
4
5
3
4
5
10
11
12
5 VDC
+
14
7 7
6
+ 5
6 6
13 +
5 VDC
+
13
6 6
5
+
5 VDC 6
7 7
14
+
12
11
5
4
5
4
4
3
+
COM2
7
8 8
15
COM3
9 9
10
3 3
2
NC 10 10 NC
9
2 2
1
NC 11 11 NC
8
1 1
0
NC 12 12 NC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number). For the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HX/C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the I/O word is as follows.
0 to 9 Unit: n= IR 100 + 10 × unit number
A to F Unit: n= IR 400 + 10 × (unit number – A)
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
168
Specifications Appendix B
DC Input Unit C200H-ID215 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
5.6 k W
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25 ° C)
4 (8 points/common)
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
COM0
1000 pF
CN1
IN00
IN07
COM1
IN08
IN15
5.6 k
W
620
W
Internal
Circuit
COM2
IN00
1000 pF
CN2 IN07
COM3
IN08 5.6 k
W
620
W
IN15
Terminal Connections
24 VDC
+
+
NC
NC
NC
COM1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
CN1
I/O word “n”
B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
A
12
NC
11
10
NC
NC
COM0
7
6
5
4
2
1
3
2
1
0
+
24 VDC
+
24 VDC
+
+
COM2
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
NC
NC
NC
CN2
I/O word “n+1”
8
9
10
11
12
6
7
4
5
2
3
A B
1 1
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
NC
NC
NC
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM3
+
24 VDC
+
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the graphs on the following page for details.
169
Specifications Appendix B
Usable I/O Points (C200H-ID215)
To prevent overheating in the C200H-ID215 that can cause early failure of internal components, limit the number of input points that are ON simultaneously. As shown below, the number of points that can be on simultaneously depends on both the temperature and the input voltage.
For example, 22 pts with input voltage of 24.0 VDC can be ON at 55 ° C, but only 16 pts with input voltage of
26.4 VDC can be ON at 55 ° C. At 24.0 VDC, all 32 input pts can be ON up to 43 ° C, but at 26.4 VDC all 32 input pts can be ON up to 34 ° C.
Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC
32
30
Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55
°
C,
22 points ON
22
20
16
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55
°
C,
16 points ON
10
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 34
°
C,
32 points ON
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 43 ° C,
32 points ON
0
0 10 20 30 34 40 43 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (
°
C)
Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.
170
Specifications Appendix B
TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as a 32-point Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit; output resistance 4.7 k W )
None
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
5 VDC
4.7 k
W
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
5 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
5 VDC
CN1
4.7 k
W
Fuse
OUT00
OUT07
COM2
5 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM3
CN2
171
Specifications Appendix B
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word “n”
5 VDC
+
COM1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
L
NC
NC
+5 VDC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
12
11
10
9
NC
NC
+5 VDC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM0
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
5 VDC
+
5 VDC
+
CN2
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
COM2
+5 VDC
I/O word “n+1”
A B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM3
+5 VDC
10 10
NC
NC
11
12
11
12
NC
NC
+
5 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10
×
unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 k
W
.
TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit; output resistance 4.7 k W )
None
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
172
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Appendix B
Internal
Circuit
5 VDC
4.7 k W
4.7 k
W
Fuse
DATA00
DATA07
COM0
5 VDC
CN1
Fuse
STB00
STB07
COM1
5 VDC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
5 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM3
CN2
Terminal Connections
NC
+V1
COM1
STB7
STB6
STB5
STB4
STB3
STB2
STB1
STB0
NC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
CN1
B
12
A
12
NC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
NC
+V0
COM0
+
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
5 VDC
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
Data input
Strobe input
Strobe input
Data input
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
5 VDC
CN2
A
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
+
COM2
+V2
NC
NC
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
12
B
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
12
NC
NC
STB8
STB9
STB10
STB11
STB12
STB13
STB14
STB15
COM3
+V3
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 k
W
.
173
Specifications Appendix B
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215 (Used as 32-point Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
None
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
90 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured on or after November 30th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 30Y9 or later*)
Internal
Circuit
10 k
Ω
8.2 k Ω
Fuse
10 k Ω
8.2 k
Ω Fuse
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM3
*Manufacturing Numbers jj
Y9
CN1
CN2
Internal
Circuit
6.8 k
Ω
15 k Ω Fuse
6.8 k Ω
15 k
Ω Fuse
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM3
CN1
CN2
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999 → 9, 2000 → 0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
174
Specifications Appendix B
Terminal Connections
5 to 24
VDC
+
CN1
I/O word “n”
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
12
11
10
9
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM0
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
+
5 to 24
VDC
+
CN2
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
L
COM2
+5 to 24 VDC
7
I/O word “n+1”
A B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM3
+5 to 24 VDC
10 10
NC
NC
11
12
11
12
NC
NC
5 to 24
+ VDC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10
×
unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215
(Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
None Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight
Dimensions
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
90 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
175
Specifications Appendix B
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Internal
Circuit
10 k Ω
10 k
Ω
8.2 k
Ω Fuse
8.2 k Ω
Fuse
5 to
24 VDC
DATA00
DATA07
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
STB00
STB07
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM3
*Manufacturing Numbers jj Y9
CN1
CN2
Units manufactured on or after November 30th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 30Y9 or later*)
Internal
Circuit
6.8 k Ω
6.8 k
Ω
15 k
Ω Fuse
15 k
Ω Fuse
5 to
24 VDC
DATA00
DATA07
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
STB00
STB07
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM3
CN1
CN2
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999 → 9, 2000 → 0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
Terminal Connections
NC
+V1
COM1
STB7
STB6
STB5
STB4
STB3
STB2
STB1
STB0
NC
B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
2
1
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
A
12
NC
11
10
NC
+V0
COM0
+
5 to 24 VDC
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
Data input
Strobe input
Strobe input
Data input
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
5 to 24 VDC
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
+
COM2
+V2
NC
NC
B
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
CN2
A
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
3
4
1
2
NC
NC
STB8
STB9
STB10
STB11
STB12
STB13
STB14
STB15
COM3
+V3
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. When the output device (such as a numeric display) does not have a pull-up resistor, it is necessary to add a pull-up resistor between the + terminal of the power supply and each data (0 to 15) and strobe (0 to
15) terminal.
176
Specifications Appendix B
6. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
High-density I/O Unit Limitations
Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.
Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply voltage, as shown below.
100
50
16
0
0 4.5
10 20.4
26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501
(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuses
Power for External Supply
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit; output resistance 4.7 k W )
None
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
2 (8 points/common)
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs
5 VDC
4.5 to 5.5 VDC
1.1 k W
3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
3.0 VDC min.
1.0 VDC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
177
Specifications Appendix B
General Specifications
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130
×
34.5
×
100.5 (H
×
W
×
D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
5 VDC
4.7 k
W
Internal
Circuit
2.4 k
W
Fuse
1.1 k
W
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
5 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
COM2
IN08
IN15
COM3
CN1 (Output)
CN2 (Input)
Terminal Connections
5 VDC
+
CN1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
NC
+5 VDC
COM1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I/O word “n”
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
A
12
NC
11
10
NC
+5 VDC
COM0
7
6
5
4
L
L
L
2
1
3
2
1
0
L
L
L
L
L
5 VDC
+
5 VDC
+
+
CN2
COM2
I/O word “n+1”
A B
0 8
1 1
1 9
2 2
2 10
3 3
3 11
4 4
4 12
5 5
5 13
6 6
6 14
7 7
7 15
8 8
COM3
9 9
NC
NC
NC
10
11
12
10
11
12
NC
NC
NC
+
5 VDC
+
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
4. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 k
W
.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.
178
Specifications Appendix B
TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit; output resistance 4.7 k W )
None
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
5 VDC
4.5 to 5.5 VDC
1.1 k W
3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
3.0 VDC min.
1.0 VDC max.
General Specifications
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
5 VDC
4.7 k
W
Internal
Circuit
2.4 k
W
Fuse
1.1 k W
STB00
STB07
COM0
5 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
CN1
COM2
DATA08
CN2
DATA15
COM3
179
Specifications
Terminal Connections
5 VDC
+
CN1
NC
NC
+V1
COM1
STB15
STB14
STB13
STB12
10
9
8
7
6
5
B
12
11
STB11
STB10
STB9
STB8
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
A
12
11
4
3
2
1
NC
NC
+V0
5 VDC
COM0
+
STB7
STB6
STB5
STB4
STB3
STB2
STB1
STB0
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
CN2
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
COM2
NC
NC
NC
6
7
4
5
2
3
A
1
8
9
10
11
12
6
7
4
5
2
3
B
1
10
11
8
9
12
NC
NC
NC
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
Appendix B
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 k W .
12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115
(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuses
Power for External Supply
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
None
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (8 points/common)
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs
12 VDC +10% /
–15%
10.2 to 13.2 VDC
2.7 k W
4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
8.0 VDC min.
3.0 VDC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
180
Specifications Appendix B
General Specifications
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130
×
34.5
×
100.5 (H
×
W
×
D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
4.7 k
W
Internal
Circuit
620
W
Fuse
2.7 k
W
1000 pF
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
COM2
IN08
IN15
COM3
CN1
CN2
Terminal Connections
5 to 24
VDC
+
CN1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I/O word “n”
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
A
12
NC
11
10
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM0
7
6
5
4
L
L
L
2
1
3
2
1
0
L
L
L
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
+
12 VDC
+
+
CN2
COM2
I/O word “n+1”
A B
0 8
1 1
1 9
2 2
2 10
3 3
3 11
4 4
4 12
5 5
5 13
6 6
6 14
7 7
7 15
8 8
COM3
9 9
NC
NC
NC
10
11
12
10
11
12
NC
NC
NC
+
12 VDC
+
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
181
Specifications Appendix B
12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115
(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply
50 mA 12 VDC, 400 mA/common, 0.8 A/Unit
None
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
12 VDC
10.2 to 13.2 VDC
2.7 k W
4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
8.0 VDC min.
3.0 VDC max.
General Specifications
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
12 VDC
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
2.7 k
W
620
W
1000 pF
STB00
STB07
COM0
12 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
COM2
DATA08
DATA15
COM3
CN1
CN2
182
Specifications
Terminal Connections
12 VDC
+
CN1
NC
NC
+V1
COM1
STB15
STB14
STB13
STB12
STB11
STB10
STB9
STB8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B
12
11
10
9
10
9
8
7
6
5
A
12
11
4
3
2
1
NC
NC
+V0
12 VDC
COM0
+
STB7
STB6
STB5
STB4
STB3
STB2
STB1
STB0
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
CN2
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
COM2
NC
NC
NC
6
7
4
5
2
3
A
1
8
9
10
11
12
6
7
4
5
2
3
B
1
10
11
8
9
12
NC
NC
NC
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
Appendix B
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
183
Specifications Appendix B
24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215
(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuses
Power for External Supply
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
None
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (8 points/common)
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
5.6 k W
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
General Specifications
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130 × 34.5
× 100.5 (H × W × D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured on or after November 30th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 30Y9 or later*)
Internal
Circuit
5 to
24 VDC
10 k
Ω
8.2 k
Ω
620
W
Fuse
5.6 k
W
1,000 pF
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
COM2
IN08
IN15
COM3
CN1
CN2
*Manufacturing Numbers jj Y9
Internal
Circuit
5 to
24 VDC
6.8 k
Ω
15 k
Ω
620
W
Fuse
5.6 k
W
1,000 pF
OUT00
OUT07
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
COM2
IN08
IN15
COM3
CN1
CN2
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999 → 9, 2000 → 0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
184
Specifications
Terminal Connections
5 to 24
VDC
+
CN1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
10
9
8
7
6
5
B
12
11
4
3
2
1
I/O word “n”
A
12
NC
11
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
10
9
COM0
8
7
7
6
L
L
6
5
5
4
L
L
4
3
3
2
L
L
2
1
1
0
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
+
24 VDC
+
+
CN2
COM2
I/O word “n+1”
A B
0 8
1 1
1 9
2 2
2 10
3 3
3 11
4 4
4 12
5 5
5 13
6 6
6 14
7 7
7 15
8 8
COM3
9 9
NC
NC
NC
10
11
12
10
11
12
NC
NC
NC
Appendix B
+
24 VDC
+
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the graph on page 187 for details.
4. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215
(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply
100 mA 24 VDC, 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
None
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC 10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
5.6 k W
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
14.4 VDC min.
5.0 VDC max.
General Specifications
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
Dimensions
300 g max.
130
×
34.5
×
100.5 (H
×
W
×
D, in millimeters)
185
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
24 VDC
Appendix B
Units manufactured on or after November 30th, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 30Y9 or later*)
24 VDC
Internal
Circuit
10 k
Ω
8.2 k
Ω
620
W
Fuse
5.6 k W
1,000 pF
STB00
STB07
COM0
24 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
COM2
DATA08
DATA15
COM3
CN1
CN2
Internal
Circuit
6.8 k
Ω
15 k
Ω
620
W
Fuse
5.6 k W
1,000 pF
STB00
STB07
COM0
24 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
COM2
DATA08
DATA15
COM3
CN1
CN2
*Manufacturing Numbers jj
Y9
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999 → 9, 2000 → 0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
Terminal Connections
12 VDC
+
CN1
NC
NC
+V1
COM1
STB15
STB14
STB13
STB12
STB11
STB10
STB9
STB8
6
5
8
7
4
3
2
1
B
12
11
10
9
10
9
8
7
A
12
11
6
5
4
3
2
1
NC
NC
+V0
12 VDC
COM0
+
STB7
STB6
STB5
STB4
STB3
STB2
STB1
STB0
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
CN2
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
COM2
NC
NC
NC
4
5
6
7
2
3
A
1
8
9
10
11
12
4
5
6
7
2
3
B
1
10
11
8
9
12
NC
NC
NC
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 k
W
.
4. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the graph on the next page for details.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.
6. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
186
Specifications Appendix B
High-density I/O Unit Limitations
Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.
Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply voltage, as shown below.
100
50
16
0
0 4.5
10 20.4
26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
Usable I/O Points (C200H-MD215)
To prevent overheating in the C200H-MD215 and prevent early failure of internal components, limit the number of input points ON simultaneously. The number of points that can be on simultaneously depends on both the temperature and the input voltage. (There is no limit to the number of output points that can be ON simultaneously.)
16
15
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 55
°
,
11 points ON
11
10
Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC
Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
5
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 43
°
,
16 points ON
0
0 10 20 30 34 40 43 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (
°
C)
Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.
187
Specifications Appendix B
C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit
The Interrupt Input Unit temporarily interrupts the main program by means of inputs, and executes interrupt subroutines. It must be mounted to a
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Rack, and a maximum of two Interrupt Input
Units can be mounted on the Rack. (It is possible to mount it to an Expansion I/O
Rack, but in that case it will be treated as a Standard Input Unit and will have no interrupt functions.) Use a C200HW-BC jj 1 Backplane. The word number of the slot position to which the Unit is mounted is allocated as eight input points.
Operation display area:
Displays the ON/OFF status of interrupts.
Terminal block:
Consists of removable components.
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
12 to 24 VDC +10%
2 K Ω
10 mA typical (24 VDC)
10.2 VDC min.
3.0 VDC max.
0.2 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
/
–15%
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 20 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
12 to 24 VDC
COM
2 k
W
0.01
m
F
1.8
k
W
Internal
Circuit
Input indicator
Either plus or minus can be used for the input power supply.
188
Specifications
Terminal Connections
12 to 24 VDC
COM
NC
2
3
0
1
4
5
6
7
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
Appendix B
189
Specifications Appendix B
Analog Timer Unit C200H-TM001
Item
Oscillation Method
Time Setting Range
Specifications
CR oscillation
Use the DIP switch to set any of the following four ranges, according to the chart shown on the next page.
0.1 to 1 second (typical)
1 to 10 seconds (typical)
10 to 60 seconds (typical)
1 to 10 minutes (typical)
Timer Pause Function The timing operation can be paused if so specified by the program. Therefore, the timers can also be used as cumulative registers.
Number of Timer Points 4
Indicators
External Variable
Resistor
Bit Allocation
SET and TIME UP
External variable resistors can be used to set the time value when the IN/EXT selector is set to OFF (EXT). Use 20 k W variable resistors.
Bit Function
The word is determined by the system configuration.
00
01
T0 start output
T1 start output
“1” when time is running
02
03
T2 start output
T3 start output
04
05
06
T0 pause output
T1 pause output
T2 pause output
0
1
Operates
Stops
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
T3 pause output
T0 time-up input
T1 time-up input
T2 time-up input
T3 time-up input
Cannot be used
“1” when time is up
Programming and
Timing Chart
Timer start input
Timer start input word n bits 08 through 11
Timer setting
(word n bits 00 through 03)
Time-up output Time-up output
Time-up flag
Timer set value
Internal Current
Consumption
60 mA 5 VDC max.
190
Specifications
I nternal variable resistors
These variable resistors are used to set the timers. The settings of these resistors are effective only when the corresponding IN/EXT selector is ON. To set or adjust the time, use the screwdriver supplied with the
Unit. Turn the variable resistor clockwise to increase the time value. The numbers 0 through
3 correspond to T0 through T3, respectively.
TM001
0
2
1
3
Appendix B
Indicators
The SET indicators in the top row light when the corresponding timer is operating. The TIME UP indicators in the bottom row light when the corresponding timer (T0 through T3) turns ON.
Time range setting
Min.
Max.
2
3
0
1
IN/EXT selectors
When the internal variable resistor is used, set the corresponding pin to ON; when an external variable resistor is used, set the corresponding pin to OFF. Pin numbers 4 through 1 correspond to T0 through T3, respectively.
Timers
T0
T1
T2
T3
(0: OFF 1: ON)
External variable resistor connectors
External variable resistors can also be used to set the timers. The IN/EXT selector pin must be set to the
OFF position. Numbers 0 through 3 correspond to T0 through T3, respectively. Use 20-k W variable resistors and AWG 22 to 28 lead wires. The connector has solderless terminals and must be wired as shown below.
3
2
5
4
1
Pin
8
7
6
0.1 to 1 s 0.1 to 10 s 10 to 60 s
0 1 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1 to 10 m
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
191
Specifications Appendix B
External variable resistor connector
External variable resistor
!
Caution Ensure that the external variable resistor connectors are open when using the internal variable resistor.
Standard B7A Interface Unit C200H-B7AI1/B7AO1
The Standard B7A Interface Unit used with the B7A Link Terminal allows the transmission and reception of
16-point I/O data over two wires.
The following Standard B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal models are available.
B7A Interface Unit
16-point input: C200H-B7AI1
16-point output: C200H-B7AO1
B7A Link Terminals
B7A-T6 j 1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-T6D2 (Modular models)
B7A-R6 jj 1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-R6A52 (Modular models)
Note If the B7A Interface Unit is mounted to a Rack with a C200HW-PD024 24-VDC Power Supply Unit, supply
24 VDC from an independent power supply to the B7A Interface Unit or use a transformer to separate the power supply line to the B7A Interface Unit from the power supply lines to the CPU Unit and I/O Power Supply Unit.
I/O indicator
ERR indicator
12 to 24 VDC
Connection terminals
Connection terminals for the B7A Link Terminal:
Connect this terminal to the SIG terminal of the
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect this terminal to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
192
Specifications Appendix B
I/O Indicator
Indicates the ON or OFF status of input from the B7A Link Terminal or the ON and OFF status of output to the B7A
Link Terminal.
ERR Indicator
Incorporated by the B7AI1 and lit when the B7AI1’s data transmission or reception is abnormal.
Connection Terminals
SIG: Connects to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
V–: Connects to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
!
Caution If the terminals are not connected correctly, the internal circuitry of the B7A Link Terminal will be damaged.
Note 1. The transmission cable must be a VCTF cable with a thickness of 0.75 mm
2
minimum.
2. Do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with the transmission cable in the same conduit.
Input Mode Selector
The B7AI1 incorporates an input mode selector on the back panel of the Unit, with which the following modes can be set.
Function
Input mode 15 points + 1 error
Fifteen-point input from the B7A Link
Terminal is effective. Bit 15 is used as transmission error bit.
16 points
Sixteen-point input from the B7A Link
Terminal is effective.
Switch setting
Bit no.
i
00 to 14
15
Status of input indicator lamp 15
Status of the ERR indicator
Upper side
Input 00 to input 14
Transmission error bit
Not used
Lower side
Input 00 to input 14
Input 15
Lit when input 15 is ON. Not lit when input 15 is OFF.
Lit when there is a transmission error and OFF during normal transmission
The ERR indicator is lit when an error occurs. If the error is corrected, the ERR indicator is OFF at the next transmission cycle.
When there is a transmission error, the B7A Link Terminal will hold the data just before the occurrence of the transmission error. If there is a transmission error because the B7A Link Terminal is turned off, however, data 0 is transmitted in the first transmission cycle when the B7A Link Terminal is turned on again.
Transmission errors between the C200H-B7AO1 and B7A Link Terminal are detected by the B7A Link Terminal only. Check the ERR indicator and error bit for any error.
Performance Specifications
I/O points
Item
Transmission distance
Transmission delay
Minimum input time (see note 1)
Internal current consumption
External power supply (see note 2)
Weight
C200H-B7AI1
16 points or 15 points and 1 error input
C200H-B7AO1
16 output points
500 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal separately.
100 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal from a single power supply. (24 VDC ± 10%)
Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
--16 ms
5 VDC, 100 mA max.
12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, 10 mA min.
200 g max.
12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, 30 mA min.
Note 1. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU
Unit. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface Unit should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
2. The value of the external power supply does not include the value required by the B7A Link Terminal.
193
Specifications Appendix B
Group-2 B7A Interface Units (C200H-B7A
jj
)
A Group-2 B7A Interface Unit used with two or four B7A Link Terminals allows the transmission and reception of
32-point or 64-point I/O data over two-conductor cables.
Group-2 B7A Interface Unit
CPU
Unit
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
Input B7A Link Terminal
Switch
Sensor
Output B7A Link Terminal
Lamps and other loads
Group-2 B7A Interface Units can be mounted to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. They cannot be mounted to Slave Racks.
The words allocated to Group-2 B7A Interface Units are determined by I/O number set on the Units. Units with 32
I/O points are allocated two words; Units with 64 I/O points are allocated four words.
Refer to the B7A Link Terminals Datasheet for more information on B7A Link Terminals.
Models
The following Group-2 B7A Interface Units are available.
B7A Interface Unit
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
32 points
None
16 points
32 points
Inputs
None
32 points
16 points
32points
Outputs
194
Specifications Appendix B
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Only 16-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to a B7A Interface Unit. These are listed in the following tables.
Input Terminals
Type
Screw terminals
Transmission delay
Modular
PC connectors
Model
B7A-T6 j 1
B7AS-T6 j 1
B7A-T6 j
6
B7AS-T6 j 6
B7A-T6D2
B7A-T6D7
B7A-T j E3
B7A-T j E8
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Output Terminals
Type
Screw terminals
Transmission delay
Modular
PC connectors
Model
B7A-R6 jj
1
B7AS-R6 jj 1
B7A-R6 jj 6
B7AS-R6 jj 6
B7A-R6A52
B7A-R6A57
B7A-R j A j 3
B7A-R j A j 8
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Note 1. Do not connect Terminals with different transmission delays to the same Interface Unit. Doing so will cause a transmission error.
2. B7A Link Terminals with 10-points and B7A Link Terminals with mixed I/O (8 inputs/8 outputs) cannot be connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. 16-point B7A Link Terminals include 16-point (input or output) models, models with 2 circuits configured with 16 points, and models with 16 points of mixed I/O.
Comparison between Standard and Group-2 B7A Interface Units
Models Word allocations
Standard C200H-B7AI1 Same as I/O Units (in order
Group-2
C200H-B7AO2
C200H-B7A12 Words 030 to 049 allocated
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
Units; see note below)
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Transmission delay
Standard
Transmission errors
Input status
Points
16-point
(19.2 ms)
Standard automatically
Switch setting
32 i t d
Terminals cannot
(3 ms) types switch) status.
Note In the case of Group-2 B7A Interface Units, words 030 to 049 (Group-2 High-density I/O Unit and B7A Interface Unit Area) are allocated according to the setting of the I/O number setting switch on the front of the Unit as shown in the following table. For mixed I/O Units, words are allocated in in the order output
→
input.
195
Specifications Appendix B
Type Models
32 input points
32 output points
16 output points/16 input points
32 output points/32 input points
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
Words allocated per
Unit
2
4
Allocation order
2 words for inputs
2 words for outputs
1 word for outputs
→
1 word for inputs
2 words for outputs →
2 words for inputs
Example: For I/O number 0
030: input
030: output
030: output
031: input
030: output
031: output
032: input
033: input
Note B7A Link Terminals with 10-points and B7A Link Terminals with mixed I/O (8 inputs/8 outputs) cannot be connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. 16-point B7A Link Terminals include
16-point models (input and output), models with 2 circuits configured with 16 points, and models with 16 points of mixed I/O.
Parts and Names (C200H-B7A22 shown below)
Front
I/O number switch
This switch determines the words allocated to the
Unit.
Status indicators
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit.
Connection terminals
Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal and to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link
Terminal. The actual use of these terminals depends on the B7A Interface Unit.
External Power Supply Terminals
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
196
Specifications
Back
DIP switch
Used to set the transmission delay, transmission error processing mode, input mode, and ERROR indicator operation.
Appendix B
Indicator Operation
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit, as shown below.
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR
Name
Input transmission error
3ms Transmission delay setting
LOAD OFF Transmission error process
15IN+ERR Input mode setting
Color
Red
Function
Lights when an error occurs in transmissions from an Input B7A Link Terminal.
For the B7A12/22, ERROR 1 is for the first word allocated to the B7A Interface
Unit; ERROR 2 is for the second word.
Orange Lit when the transmission delay is set to the high-speed setting (3 ms).
Not lit when the transmission delay is set to the standard setting (19.2 ms).
Orange Lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to reset input status.
Not lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to hold input status.
Orange Lit when the input mode mode is set to use 15 inputs and 1 error input.
Not lit when the input mode mode is set to use 16 inputs.
I/O Number Setting
The setting of the I/O number determines the words allocated to the Interface Unit. Set the I/O number to between
0 and 9.
Setting in direction of notch
Note 1. Turn off the power supply to the PC before changing the I/O number setting. Any new setting will not be effective until the next time the power supply is turned on.
2. Use a flat-blade screw driver to change the I/O number setting. Be careful not to leave the switch halfway between settings and be careful not to damage the switch.
197
Specifications Appendix B
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
7
8
9
The following table shows the words allocated according to the I/O number. The 32-point Units are the
C200H-B7A12, C200H-B7A02, and C200H-B7A21. The 64-point Unit is the C200H-B7A22.
I/O No.
32-point Units
IR 030 and IR 031
IR 032 and IR 033
IR 034 and IR 035
IR 036 and IR 037
IR 038 and IR 039
IR 040 and IR 041
IR 042 and IR 043
IR 044 and IR 045
IR 046 and IR 047
IR 048 and IR 049
Words
64-point Unit
IR 030 to IR 033
IR 032 to IR 035
IR 034 to IR 037
IR 036 to IR 039
IR 038 to IR 041
IR 040 to IR 043
IR 042 to IR 045
IR 044 to IR 047
IR 046 to IR 049
Do not use.
Note 1. Be sure that the same words are not allocated to more than one Unit. For example, if you set a 64-point
Unit to I/O number 0, you cannot use I/O number 1 for any Unit.
2. The above words are also allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units. Be sure that the same words are not allocated to more than one Unit.
DIP Switch Settings
Set the DIP switch as described before for the various models of B7A Interface Units.
C200H-B7A22/12
Factory setting
(pins 4 and 5 ON)
4
5
6
2
3
1
Pin Function
Transmission delay
OFF ON
Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
Transmission error process Hold status
Input mode 16 inputs
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
ERROR 1 indicator enable Disabled
ERROR 2 indicator enable Disabled
Not used.
NA
Enabled
Enabled
NA
C200H-B7A21
Factory setting
(pin 5 ON)
4
5
2
3
6
1
Pin Function
Transmission delay
OFF ON
Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
Transmission error process Hold status
Input mode 16 inputs
ERROR indicator enable
Not used.
Not used.
Disabled
NA
NA
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
NA
NA
C200H-B7A02
Factory setting
(all pins OFF)
5
6
3
4
1
2
Pin Function
Transmission delay
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
OFF ON
Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
NA NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Transmission Delay
Pin 1 is used to set the transmission delay. The same delay is used for all words allocated to the Unit.
198
Specifications Appendix B
Set the transmission delay to match that of the B7A Link Terminal. A transmission error will occur if the same transmission delay is not set.
The “3ms” indicator will be lit whenever the high-speed (3 ms) transmission delay is set.
Transmission Error Process
Pin 2 is used to turned ON to specify resetting input status when transmission errors occur. If pin 2 is turned OFF, input status will be held when transmission errors occur.
The LOAD OFF indicator will be lit whenever pin 2 is turned ON.
Input Mode
Pin 3 is turned ON to specify use of only 15 inputs and the use of bit 15 as a Transmission Error Flag. If pin 3 is OFF,
16 normal inputs can be used.
The “15IN+ERR” indicator will be lit whenever pin 3 is turned ON.
ERROR Indicators
Pin 4 or pins 4 and 5 are turned ON to enable the ERROR, ERROR 1, and/or ERROR 2 indicators. These indicators will not light even if a transmission error occurs if the corresponding pin is turned OFF.
Transmission Error Precautions
Startup
The Transmission Error Flag for the B7A Interface Unit will be OFF when power is turned on to the
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. If normal transmissions with the B7A Link Terminal are not possible within about 10 ms, the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting).
All input bits will remain OFF until normal transmissions are achieved.
Inputs
When a transmission error occurs, input status will be either held or all inputs will be reset according to the setting for the transmission error process, and the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting). The Transmission Error Flag will go OFF and the input status will return to normal when normal transmissions are achieved again.
Outputs
Transmission errors for Output B7A Link Terminals are not detected at the B7A Interface Unit and must be confirmed using the error indicators or error outputs on the Link Terminal.
199
Specifications Appendix B
Wiring
Terminal Names and Allocations
The use of the terminals depends on the model of the B7A Interface Unit. “m” indicates the first word allocated to the Unit according to the I/O number setting and can be calculated as follows: m = 030 + (2 x I/O number)
C200H-B7A22
Terminal
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
Name Function
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
– OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
– OUT2
SIG IN1
– IN1
SIG IN2
– IN2
NC
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word m m + 1 m + 2 m + 3
NA
C200H-B7A21
Terminal
B0
B1
B2, B3
B4
B5
B6 to B8
Name Function
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
– OUT1
NC
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
SIG IN1
– IN1
NC
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
A0 to A7
B9
A8
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
C200H-B7A12
Terminal
B0
B1
Name
SIG IN1
– IN1
B2, B3
B4
B5
NC
SIG IN2
– IN2
Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
B6 to B8 NC
A0 to A7
B9 +V
A8 –V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word m
NA m + 1
NA
Word m
NA m + 1
NA
200
Specifications Appendix B
C200H-B7A02
Terminal Name Function
B0
B1
B2, B3
B4
B5
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
– OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
NC Not used.
SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
– OUT2
NC
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
B9
A8
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word m
NA m + 1
NA
Recommended Cables and Transmission Distance
The following cables are recommended to connect the B7A Interface Unit to B7A Link Terminals. The wiring method and transmission distance depend on the transmission delay and on whether or not a common power supply is being used for the B7A Link Terminal and the Interface Unit.
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms): Cap-tire Cable
Power supply
Common
Separate
Cable
VCTF, 0.75 mm 2 x 3 conductors
VCTF ,0.75 mm
2
x 2 conductors
Transmission distance
100 m max.
500 m max.
High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable
Power supply
Common
Separate
Cable Transmission distance
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm 2 x 3 conductors 50 m max.
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm 2 x 2 conductors 100 m max.
Terminal Construction
Use hook-type crimp connectors with a line thickness of 0.25 to 1.65 mm
2
. The construction of the terminals is shown in the illustration.
Wiring Method
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms)
Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm 2 or higher
201
Specifications
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Appendix B
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm 2 or higher
12 to 24 VDC
High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable
Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission distance: 50 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
GND
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm 2 or higher
24 VDC ± 10%
GND
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm 2 or higher
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Interface Unit
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
12 to 24 VDC
B7A Link Terminal
GND
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm 2 or higher
12 to 24 VDC
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 VDC
GND
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm 2 or higher
Note 1. We recommend grounding the shielded cable.
2. If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used. (Use 0.75 mm 2 or higher VCTF cable.)
3. To prevent noise on the transmission cable, do not lay it near power cables or high-voltage lines.
202
Specifications Appendix B
Specifications
Item
I/O points
C200H-B7A12
32 input points or
30 input points and 2 error inputs
C200H-B7A02
32 output points
C200H-B7A21
16 output points and
16 input points or
15 input points + 1 error input
C200H-B7A22
32 output points and
32 input points or
30 input points + 2 error inputs
Transmission method
Transmission distance (see note 1)
Transmission delay
Minimum input time (see note
2, 3)
Internal current consumption
External power
One-way distributed multiplex transmission
Standard:
High-speed:
Standard:
High-speed:
Standard:
High-speed:
500 m max.
100 m max.
Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
Typ. 3 ms, 5 ms max.
16 ms
2.4 ms
5 VDC, 100 mA max.
12 to 24 VDC ± 10%
0.05 A min.
note 4)
Weight
Dimensions
0.06 A min.
300 g max.
35 x 130 x 128 mm (W x H x D)
0.05 A min.
0.08 A min.
Note 1. The transmission distance also depends on whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
2. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU
Unit.
3. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface
Unit should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
4. The capacity of the external power supply does not include the capacity required by the B7A Link Terminal.
Dimensions
130 x x x x x x x x
35
128
145
Backplane
203
Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Maximum Current and Power Supplied
There are limits to the current and power that can be supplied to each Rack and Unit. When designing the system, take the current consumption into account.
Follow the charts below and be careful that the total current consumption does not exceed the maximum current and maximum total power supplied.
Current Supplied
Model number
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
4.6 A
4.6 A
4.6 A
9.0 A
4.6 A
5 V
Max. current supplied
26 V
0.6 A
(No-voltage
---
24 V contact current)
0.6 A
0.6 A
1.3 A
0.6 A
0.8 A
---
---
---
Maximum power supplied
30 W
30 W
30 W
45 W
30 W
Note The sum total of the 5-V, 26-V, and 24-V power consumptions must be equal to or less than 30 W for the
PA204 j
, or equal to or less than 45 W for the PA209.
Design the system so that the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1
(1) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 5-V system)
≤
(the figure in the
5-V column)
(2) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 26-V system)
≤
(the figure in the
26-V column)
(3) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 24-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
24-V column)
Condition 2
(1) x 5 V + (2) x 26 V + (3) x 24 V
≤
(maximum power supplied)
Calculating Current and Power Consumption
The method of calculating current and power consumption is demonstrated here using the following Unit combinations as examples.
Example 1: For C200HW-PA204S
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID211 No-voltage Input Units: 3 Units
LK202 Host Link Unit: 1 Unit
External power supply used: 0.3 A
Power Supply
5-V system
26-V system
24-V system
Total = 20.92 W (
≤
30 W)
Current Consumption
0.01 x 7 + 0.25 = 0.32 A (
≤
4.6 A)
0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (
≤
0.6 A)
0.06 x 3 + 0.3 = 0.48 A (
≤
0.8 A)
Power Consumption
0.32 A x 5 V = 1.6 W
0.30 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
0.48 A x 24 V = 11.52 W
205
Unit Current and Power Consumption Appendix C
Example 2 : For C200HW-PA204S
ID212 DC Input Units:
CT002 High-speed Counter Units:
6 Units
2 Units
External power supply used (for ID212): 0.8 A
Power Supply
5-V system
26-V system
24-V system
Total = 22.5 W (
≤
30W)
Current Consumption
0.01 x 6 + 0.3 x 2 = 0.66 A (
0
Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (
Example 3 : For C200HW-PA204S
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID217 High-density Input Unit:
OD219 High-density Output Unit:
1 Unit
1 Unit
CT002 High-speed Counter Unit: 1 Unit
External power supply used (for ID217): 0.3 A
≤
≤
4.6 A)
0.8 A)
Power Consumption
0.66 A x 5 V = 3.3 W
0
0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Power Supply Current Consumption
5-V system
26-V system
24-V system
Total = 18.65 W (
≤
30 W)
0.01 x 4 + 0.12 + 0.27 +0.3
= 0.73 A ( ≤ 4.6 A)
0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (
≤
0.6 A)
Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (
≤
0.8 A)
Power Consumption
0.73 A x 5 V = 3.65 W
0.3 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Calculating Power Consumption for Racks
The total power consumption (primary power input) for an individual Rack can be broadly calculated as shown in the following examples.
Example 1 : CPU Rack
Total power consumption of Units + 3.5
0.6 x 0.55 (VA)
3.5 = CPU Unit power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55= Power rate
Example 2 : All Other Racks
Current Drawn by CPU
Units and Backplanes
Total power consumption of Units + 2
0.6 x 0.55 (1) (VA)
2 = I/O Power Supply Unit (Remote I/O Slave Unit) power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55 (1) = Power rate
(Number in parentheses: when RT002-P or RT202 is used.)
Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Backplane
I/O Backplane
Model 5-V supply
C200HE-CPU jj
-E
C200HG-CPU jj -E
C200HX-CPU jj -E
0.5 A
C200HW-BC jjj 0.1 A
C200HW-BI jjj 0.15 A
---
26-V supply
---
---
Current Drawn by
Communications Boards
Unit
Communications
B d
Model 5-V supply
C200HW-COM01
C200HW-COM02
0.03 A
0.1 A
C200HW-COM03 0.2 A
C200HW-COM04-E 0.1 A
C200HW-COM05-E 0.1 A
C200HW-COM06-E 0.2 A
---
---
---
---
---
---
26-V supply
206
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Current Drawn by Standard
I/O Units
Unit
DC Input
AC Input
AC/DC Input
Contact Output
Transistor Output
Model number
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122/IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222/IA222V
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC226
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216
Triac Output
Analog Timer
Standard B7A
I f
Interrupt Input
C200H-OD217
C200H-OA21A
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA224
C200H-TM001
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
C200HS-INT01
Current Drawn by Group-2
High-density I/O Units
Unit
DC Input
Transistor Output
Model number
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID219
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD219
C200H-OD21B
Current Drawn by Group-2
B7A Interface Units
Unit
B7A Interface Unit
2 U i )
Model number
C200H-B7A12/02
C200H-B7A21/22
Appendix C
5-V supply
0.01 A each
26-V supply
---
0.01 A each
8 i
0.16 A
0.20A
0.18 A
0.27 A
0.06 A
0.10 A
0.02 A
0.05 A
0.008 A
0.01 A
0.03 A
0.14 A
0.16 A
0.18 A
0.14 A
0.01 A each
0.09 A per 8 points are si-
ON
---
0.075 A per
8 points are simultaneously ON
---
5-V supply
0.12 A
0.1 A
0.12 A
0.1 A
0.12 A
0.18 A
0.27 A
0.18 A
26-V supply
---
5-V supply
0.10 A
26-V supply
---
207
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Current Drawn by Other
Units
Unit
Host Link
Model number
C200H-LK101-PV1
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK202-V1
C200H-LK401 PC Link
CompoBus/D
Master
CompoBus/S
Master
C200HW-DRM21
C200HW-SRM21
Remote Master C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RM201
SYSMAC LINK C200HW-SLK13/SLK14/
SLK23/SLK24
SYSMAC NET Link C200HS-SNT32
Power Supply
Adapter
C200H-APS01/APS02/
APS03
Appendix C
0.15 A
0.20 A
0.25 A
0.80 A
1.00 A
0 A
5-V supply
0.25 A
0.15 A
0.25 A
0.35 A
0.25 A
26-V supply
---
---
---
---
Current Drawn by Special
I/O Units
Unit Model number
TTL Input
DC Input
TTL Output
Transistor Output
TTL I/O
Position Control
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD501
C200H-OD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215
C200H-CT001-V1
C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021
C200H-NC111
C200H-NC112
C200H-NC211
C200H-NC113
C200H-NC213
Analog Input
Analog Output
C200H-NC413
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-PID03
Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221
I
ASCII
Voice Output
ID Sensor
C200H-TS001/TS002
C200H-TS101/TS102
C200H-ASC02
C200H-OV001
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
5-V supply
0.13 A
26-V supply
---
0.22 A
0.18 A
0.30 A
0.45 A
0.15 A
0.50 A
0.30 A
0.50 A
0.55 A
0.45 A
0.65 A
0.60 A
0.65 A
(0.85 A when a
Teaching Box is connected)
0.45 A
0.20 A
0.30 A
0.25 A 0.12 A
208
Unit Current and Power Consumption Appendix C
Maximum Current and
Power Supplied
Unit
Fuzzy Logic l
Model number
C200H-FZ001
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Cam Positioner C200H-CP114
Controller Link Unit C200HW-CLK21
PC Card Unit C200HW-PCU01
C200HW-PCS01
Model number
C200H-RT001-P
C200H-RT002-P
C200H-RT201
C200H-RT202
5-V supply
0.30 A
0.33 A
0.30 A
0.30 A
1.7 A
5 V
Max. current supplied
26 V 24 V
2.7 A 0.6 A 0.8 A
---
0.8 A
---
26-V supply
---
---
---
Maximum supplied
28 W
23 W
28 W
23 W
Note The sum total of the 5-V, 26-V, and 24-V power consumptions must be equal to or less than the value for the maximum power supplied given in the above table (28 W or 23 W).
209
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Racks
The dimensions shown below are for both the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks. The C dimension for the Programming Console will increase by 30 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP001 is used, and will increase by 50 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP002 is used.
CPU Units
Memory Cassettes
Communications Boards
73.2
44 9.1
C200HW-COM02/03/05-E/06-E C200HW-COM01/04-E
211
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Backplanes
130
W
17
Backplane Model
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081-V1
C200HW-BC101-V1
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
I/O Connecting Cables
The dimensions shown below are for I/O Connecting Cables.
L
74 64
Width (W)
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
189 mm
259 mm
364 mm
434 mm
49
15
Cable
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
30 cm
Length (L)
70 cm
2 m
5 m
10 m
Appendix D
212
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Power Supply Units
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PA209R
Appendix D
213
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
C200H-PRO27 Programming Console
The dimensions shown below are for the Programming Console.
Appendix D
192
96
(30)
48
C200H-CN222/CN422 Connecting Cable
33
2000 (4000)
29 12
Standard I/O Units
The dimensions shown below are for the two shapes of Standard I/O Units mentioned throughout these specifications.
10-terminal Terminal Block (A-shape I/O Units)
130
35 x x x x
101
118
Backplane
214
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
10-terminal Terminal Block (E-shape I/O Units)
130 x x x x
35
C200H-OA223
121
138
19-terminal Terminal Block (B-shape I/O Units)
130 x x x x x x x x
35
Backplane
128
145
19-terminal Terminal Block (Extended B-shape I/O Units)
Appendix D
130 x x x x x x x x
35
152
169
215
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Terminal Dimensions
M3.5
7.3
8.5
Interrupt Input Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the Interrupt Input Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
x x
130 x x
35
101
118
Standard B7A Interface Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the B7A Interface Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
Appendix D
130
35
101
118
Group-2 B7A Interface Units The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 B7A Interface Units.
216
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Analog Timer Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the Analog Timer Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
Appendix D
130
35
101
118
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 High-density I/O Units.
C and D Types
130
35
101
118
Approx. 143
High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
The dimensions shown below are for the High-density I/O Units classified as Special I/O Units.
130
35 101
217
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Dimensions with Unit Mounted
Fujitsu Connector
Connecting cable
G79j C Connecting Cable
G79j
C
Connecting
Cable
Appendix D
Approx. 163
118
145
118
Mounting Dimensions
Four, M4
130
A
±
0.2
Backplane
7
118 ± 0.2
68 to 108 80 to 120
130
Four, M4
Backplane
118
±
0.2
6
W
Backplane Model
C200HW-BC031
A ± 0.2
246 mm
C200HW-BC051 316 mm
C200HW-BC081-V1 421 mm
C200HW-BC101-V1 491 mm
C200HW-BI031 175 mm
C200HW-BI051 245 mm
C200HW-BI081-V1 350 mm
C200HW-BI101-V1 420 mm
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
189 mm
259 mm
364 mm
434 mm
W
218
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Panel Mounting of C200H-PRO27 Programming Console
Bracket
Two screws
Appendix D
Panel thickness (t = 1.0 to 3.2)
The following is the standard panel cut dimensions for the Programming Console (conforming to DIN 43700).
186
+1.1
0
92
+0.8
0
Use the C200H-ATT01 Mounting Bracket (sold separately) to mount the C200H-PRO27 Programming Console to panels.
75.5
116
9.1
14.1
219
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D
Take the space required for the cable into consideration when mounting the Programming Console to panels.
37
15
Approximately 80 mm is required.
Use either one of the connectors.
Approximately 70 mm is required.
220
Glossary
ASCII code
ASCII Unit
Backplane back-up baud rate bit central processing unit communication cable
Communications Board
Control System counter
CPU cycle time
[A(merican) S(tandard) C(ode for) I(nformation) I(nterchange)] A standard computer code used to facilitate the interchange of information among various types of data-processing equipment.
An Intelligent I/O Unit. The ASCII Unit has its own CPU and 16 kilobytes of memory. This Unit enables communication between the PC and any other device which uses ASCII code. The ASCII Unit can be programmed in BASIC.
A base to which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a series of connectors for these Units along with wiring to connect them to the CPU Unit and Power Supply. Backplanes also provide connectors used to connect them to other Backplanes. In some Systems, different Backplanes are used for different
Racks; in other Systems, Racks differ only by the Units mounted to them.
A copy of existing data which is valuable if data is accidentally erased.
Transfer speed between two devices in a system measured in bits per second.
For example, an optical sensor might be configured to send its information to the personal computer at 9600 baud. It is important for both of the devices to be set to the same baud rate.
The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON and OFF. A bit is one binary digit.
A device that is capable of storing a program and data, and executing the set of instructions contained in the program. In a PC System, the central processing unit executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external devices, etc.
Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and conforming to the RS-232C or RS-422 standards.
A board that is mounted to the optional slot of a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit. With a Communications Board, the CPU Unit can communicate with the SYSMAC
LINK Unit, SYSMAC NET Link Unit, Programmable Terminal, Temperature Controller, personal computer, bar code reader, or any other peripheral device via
RS-232C, RS-422, or RS-485.
All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.
A PC function that counts the number of occurrences of a certain event.
An acronym for central processing unit.
The total time it takes the PC to perform internal operations, i.e., reset the watchdog timer, read the program, receive input data, send output data, and execute instructions. Cycle time is monitored by the watchdog timer within the PC, and if it takes longer than a certain specified amount of time, an error message may be generated, or the CPU Unit may just stop. Cycle times will differ depending on the configuration of the system.
221
data area data link debugging default condition distributed control
EEPROM electrical noise
EPROM
Expansion I/O Unit factory computer flag
High-speed Counter host computer
IBM PC/AT or compatible instruction line interface
Glossary
An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data, e.g., the LR area is designed to hold common data in a PC Link System.
Allows for the connection of up to 32 PCs in a Net Link System where each is contributing information to a common memory area. Data links may be established in the LR and/or DM memory areas.
The process of checking for errors in a program.
The original condition of a function or system. For example, the Ladder Support
Software’s (LSS) installation utility will place the LSS in the C:\LSS directory, but this default condition can be changed so that it places the LSS in a different directory.
An automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system is located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized and “distributed” over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC
Systems.
[E(lectrically) E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of
ROM in which stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accomplished using a special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be done without having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is mounted.
Electric ‘static’ that can disturb electronic communications. The ‘snow’ that can appear on a TV screen is an example of the effects of electrical noise.
[E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM in which stored data can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and reprogrammed.
An I/O Unit for a Package-type PC that provides more I/O points to the PC.
A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that is used in automated factory control.
A bit that is turned ON and OFF automatically by the system in order to provide status information.
A Special I/O Unit. A High Speed Counter Unit counts independently of the PC’s cycle time. This allows counting of very short, fast signals.
A computer that is used to transfer data to or receive data from a PC in a Host
Link system. The host computer is used for data management and overall system control. Host computers are generally small personal or business computers.
A computer that has similar architecture to, and is logically compatible with an
IBM PC/XT computer; and that can run software designed for that computer.
A succession of instructions which begins with a load instruction at the left bus bar and ends at a right bus bar.
An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usually involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface devices such as NSBs perform operations such as changing the coding, format, or speed of data.
222
I/O devices
I/O point
I/O table
I/O Unit
Limit Switch
Link Unit operating mode page parallel interface
PC
PCB
PC Link Unit
Photoelectric Switch
Power Supply printed circuit board
Programmable Controller programming device
Glossary
The devices which are connected to the terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or Intelligent I/O Units. I/O devices may be part of the Control System if they function to help control other devices, or they may be part of the controlled system if they interact directly with it.
The place at which an input signal enters the PC System or an output signal leaves the PC System. In physical terms, an I/O point corresponds to terminals or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O point corresponds to an I/O bit in the IR area.
Diagram written to the IR memory area listing the type of I/O units controlled by a
PC. It must be cleared before programming or when I/O units are changed.
Tables can be read, verified, or transferred to a EPROM.
The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.
A switch that detects when an object has reached the limit of its movement by actually making contact with the object. Limit Switches are fitted to electric elevators, traveling cranes, etc. to indicate when a certain part of the equipment has traveled to the specified limit.
Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These are Remote I/O
Units, I/O Link Units, PC Link Units, Host Link Units, and Net Link Units.
The Display Terminal Unit can operate in five different modes: Page Read, Terminal. Dynamic Scan, Read/Write, and Self-Diagnosis.
One complete Display Terminal Unit screen. Two hundred screens can be stored on one RAM card .
The parallel interface uses the RS-232 connector, but is not serial communication. When parallel mode is selected as the communication mode, up to 16 Display Terminal Units can be connected to a PC in parallel.
An acronym for Programmable Controller.
An acronym for printed circuit board.
A Unit used to connect two or more PCs together so that they can exchange data through their LR areas.
A switch that uses light to detect the presence of an object.
A Unit that mounts to a Backplane in a Rack PC. It provides power at the voltage required by the other Units on the Rack.
A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or electrical device.
A small, computer-like device that can control peripheral equipment, such as an electric door or quality control devices, based on programming and peripheral input devices. Any process that can be controlled using electrical signals can be controlled by a PC. PCs can be used independently or networked together into a system to control more complex operations.
A peripheral device used to write programs and to input a program to a PC or to alter or monitor a program already stored in the PC. There are dedicated pro-
223
PROM
PROM Writer
Proximity Switch
Rack PC
RAM register/registered
Remote I/O Unit
ROM switching capacity stepping motor switch system configuration
Unit watchdog timer word work bits
224
Glossary gramming devices, such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated programming devices, such as a host computer.
[P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM into which the program or data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed from that time on.
A PROM Writer is a device used to write data to ROM, PROM, and EPROM storage chips.
A switch that uses magnetic induction to measure the distance of a metallic object from the front of the switch.
A PC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configuration is the most flexible, and most large PCs are Rack PCs. A Rack PC is the opposite of a Package-type PC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage, and control functions built into a single package.
[R(andom) A(ccess) M(emory)] RAM will not retain data when power is disconnected. Therefore data should not be stored in RAM.
Storing text and graphics in the RAM/ROM card from a personal computer or the
ASCII Unit. Graphics that have been written to the RAM/ROM card are referred to as registered messages.
A Unit that extends the distance an Expansion I/O Unit can be from the CPU Unit.
[R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A
ROM chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it, and it can never be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as desired.
The voltage/current that relay can switch ON and OFF.
An output device that rotates according to signals from the Control System. The rotation is very precise and occurs in pre-defined “steps.”
An input device that sends either an ON or OFF signal to the Control System. A switch can be operated either by a person or by the movement of a piece of equipment or material.
The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used to describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control System that includes one or more PCs.
In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product sold for a PC System. though most of the names of these products end with the word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
A special timer inside the CPU Unit that monitors the PC’s cycle time. The watchdog timer sets a flag if the cycle time becomes longer than a certain specified value. This is useful if the correct operation of your System depends on a certain maximum cycle time.
In digital circuits, a group of bits. Usually a word consists of four, eight, or sixteen bits. In C-series PCs, a word consists of sixteen bits. Words can be used to store data, or they can be used for I/O.
Bits in the IR area that are not being used for input or output. These bits can be used in the program in any way desired.
A-B ambient temperature, 51
Analog Timer Unit dimensions, 217 specifications, 190 applications, precautions, xiv assembly, I/O Units, 58
B7A Interface Unit, dimensions, 216
B7A Interface Units dimensions, 216
Group-2 Units, 194
B7A Link Terminals, 195
Backplane Insulation Plate, 55 battery, Memory Unit, replacement, 91
C contact protection circuit, 136 control components, 2
Control System, 2 cooling, fan, 50
CPU Unit components, 14
Memory Cassettes, 17 current consumption, 205, 209
5–V supply, 207, 208 cycle, 6 cycle time, 6
D-E dimensions, 203, 211, 212, 213 duct work
I/O wiring, 76 power cables, 76
EC Directives, xv electrical noise, 74 electrostatic charge, 50 errors
CPU Rack, 84
Expansion I/O Rack, 84
Input Unit, 85
Output Unit, 86
Index
F-G factory computer, 2 grounding ground terminal, 67 line ground terminal, 67 wire, 67
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 27
C–shape, 28
D–shape, 28 dimensions, 217
H-I
High-density I/O Units, 30 dimensions, 217 limitations, 177, 187 specifications, 167 humidity, 50
I/O Unit Cover, 70
I/O Units
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 27
High-density I/O Units, 30
Standard I/O Units, 25 inductive load surge suppressor, 75 input devices, 4 installation environment ambient conditions, 50 cooling, 50 cooling fan, 51
Rack clearance, 50 precautions, xiv interlock circuit, 76
Interrupt Input Unit, dimensions, 216
L
Ladder Support Software, 31 leakage current input, 71 output, 73 limit switch, 4
LSS. See Ladder Support Software
M
Memory Cassette, 17 installing, 61 models, C200HS, 95 mounting conditions, 33
Racks, conduit, 51
225
mounting requirements, 60
DIN track mounting, 55
DIN track mounting bracket, 56 procedure, 56
O-P one-to-one link, wiring, 118 operating environment, precautions, xiii output devices, 4
PC block diagram, 5 flowchart, 7 operation, 5 role of, 4
PCs, cooling, 50 photoelectric switch, 4 power consumption, 205, 209 power interruptions, Programmable Controller, 77 precautions applications, xiv general, xi, xii operating environment, xiii safety, xii process control computer, 2
Programming Console checking initial operation, 82
Hand-held, 3 proximity switch, 4
R relay, printed circuit board, 90 relays, Output Unit, replacement, 88
RS-232C, port specifications, 117
RS-232C port connecting devices, one-to-one link, 118 specifications, 117 wiring example, 117
S safety precautions. See precautions servomotor drivers, 3 servomotors, 3, 5 short-circuit protection, 73 short–circuit protection, 146 solenoid, 5
Special I/O Units, 33 specifications
C200H-ID501, 167
C200H-IA121, 122
226
Index
C200H-IA122, 123
C200H-IA122V, 123
C200H-IA221, 124
C200H-IA222, 125
C200H-IA222V, 125
C200H-ID211, 120, 153
C200H-ID212, 121
C200H-ID215, 169
C200H-ID216, 155
C200H-ID217, 156
C200H-ID218, 158
C200H-ID219, 159
C200H-IM211, 126
C200H-IM212, 127
C200H-MD115 (dynamic), 182
C200H-MD115 (static), 180
C200H-MD215 (dynamic), 185
C200H-MD215 (static), 184
C200H-MD501 (dynamic), 179
C200H-MD501 (static), 177
C200H-OA122-E, 147
C200H-OA221, 149
C200H-OA222V, 150
C200H-OA223, 151
C200H-OA224, 152
C200H-OC221, 128
C200H-OC222, 129
C200H-OC222V, 133
C200H-OC223, 131
C200H-OC224, 132
C200H-OC224V, 135
C200H-OC225, 130
C200H-OC226, 134
C200H-OD211, 139
C200H-OD212, 140
C200H-OD213, 141
C200H-OD214, 142
C200H-OD215 (dynamic), 175
C200H-OD215 (static), 174
C200H-OD216, 144
C200H-OD217, 145
C200H-OD218, 160
C200H-OD219, 163
C200H-OD21A, 146
C200H-OD21B, 166
C200H-OD411, 138
C200H-OD501 (dynamic), 172
C200H-OD501 (static), 171
C200HS-INT01, 188
C200H-TM001, 190
Contact Output Unit, life expectancy, 136
Group-2 B7A Interface Units, 194
High-density I/O Units, 167
Standard I/O Units, 120
SSS. See SYSMAC Support Software
Standard I/O Units, 25
A–shape, 26
B–shape, 26 dimensions, 214
E–shape, 26 specifications, 120 static electricity, preventing, 50 stepping motor, 5
Support Software, SYSMAC–CPT Support Software, 32
surge current, output, 74
SYSMAC LINK, 40
SYSMAC NET Link, 41
SYSMAC Support Software, 32
SYSMAC–CPT Support Software, 32 system configuration, 3
Index
T-W terminal block, 69 transistor output, residual voltage, 73 wiring
AC Input Units, 71
DC Input Units, 70 power supply, 63
227
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W302-E1-07
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code
1
2
3
4
5
6
07
Date
June 1996
March 1997
August 1997
October 1997
June 2000
January 2001
November 2001
Revised content
Original production
Relay Output Units changed to Contact Output Units throughout the manual.
Page 11: 64-point Units column added to the second table in CPU Units .
Pages 20, 22, 82, 98, 111, 177: C200H-OC222V,
C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 Contact Output
Units added.
Page 21: Note on C200H-OC226 dimensions added.
Page 23: The settings corrected for I/O Number Setting Switch at the bottom of page.
Page 42: Ambient Conditions precautions replaced.
Page 43: Note on tightening torque added.
Page 50: Note 3 corrected.
Pages 54, 56: Crimp terminals information corrected.
Added the ZE-version C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit to
Section 2, Appendix A, and Appendix B.
Pages 17, 18, 54, 58: AC input terminal information
Page 11, 19. 57, 85, 185: Added C200HW-PA204R.
Page 16: “KB” corrected to “K words” in the table.
Page 18: Addition to first paragraph in 2-2-4 Power
Supply Units . Information on AC input terminals in the diagram corrected.
Page 19: Added sentence on power consumption restrictions and tables on CPU Units and Backplanes for C200HW-PA204R.
Page 41, 86, 188: Added Controller Link Unit and PC
Card Unit.
Page 56: Corrections and additions made to the note in the diagram.
Page xii to xiv: Major changes made to safety information.
Pages 11, 12, 13, 19, 20, 48, 49, 59, 61, 89, 90, 91,
103, 189, 196, 201: Information related to Power Supply Units and/or Backplanes added/changed.
Page 15: Information on DIP switch pin 5 changed.
Pages 22, 92: Information on Triac Output Units added/changed.
Pages 24, 26, 93, 191: Information related to Group-2
High-density I/O Units added.
Pages 30, 94, 192: Information on Position Control
Units and/or Motion Control Units added.
Page 40: Information on the number of mountable
Master I/O Units added.
Page 47: Minor change to graphic.
Page 62: Power consumption value in first line changed from 50 to 40.
Page 12: Note added after table.
Page xiv: Memory Units changed to Memory Cassettes and Power Supply Units added to the precaution item for turning OFF the power supply.
Page 29: I/O number setting changed for two 40-pin
Pages 55, 56: Crimp terminals information corrected.
EC Directives information added.
Page 57: Tightening torque information added.
Page 59: Contact output circuit corrected.
Pages 76 to 78: Output Unit Relay and Output Units added to the procedure.
Page 85: Relay added to Optional Products .
Page 93: Output capacity corrected in the table.
Page 96: Connector models corrected.
Page 112: New Contact Output Units reflected.
Pages 116, 117, 122: Circuit configurations corrected for C200H-OD212, C200H-OD213, and
C200H-OD21A.
Page 182: C200H-OC226 dimensions added.
corrected and added to.
Page 70: Note on cycling the power supply added to the procedure.
Page 56, 101/102: Added information on 24-VDC output.
Page 92: Added CompoBus/S and CompoBus/D Master Units.
Page 101: Separated output capacities and added specifications for RUN output. Enclosure rating corrected.
Page 123: Graphs corrected.
Page 196: Analog Timer Unit and Group-2 High-density I/O Units dimensions corrected.
Page 67: Precautionary information added.
Page 71: One sentence added to information on power interruptions.
Page 78: Information added to table.
Page 81: Information on Output Units added.
Page 95: Information on Voice Unit added.
Pages 105, 137: Changes made in several places.
Page 106: Information on RUN output added.
Page 107: Changes made to bit addresses.
Page 147: Information on DC Input Units added.
Pages 148, 150, 159, 161, 169, 171: Circuit configuration graphics and information on manufacturing numbers added.
Pages 149, 151, 162, 170, 171: Notes added.
Page 151: Information on Transistor Output Units added.
Page 180: Information on B7A Interface Units added.
connectors.
Page 77: Power interruption duration changed.
Page 146: Note changed to clarify indicator conditions.
229
